2018 F550superduty

User Manual: Pdf 2018-f550superduty

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 660

Download2018-f550superduty
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com

ford.ca

January 2018
Second Printing
Owner’s Manual
Super Duty
Litho in U.S.A.

JC3J 19A321 AA

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2017
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201709 20171220012136

Table of Contents
Supplementary Restraints
System

Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................8
Data Recording ...............................................10
California Proposition 65 .............................12
Perchlorate ........................................................12
Ford Credit ........................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment
...........................................................................1 4
Export Unique Options ................................15

Principle of Operation .................................46
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................47
Side Airbags ....................................................52
Safety Canopy™ ............................................53
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......54
Airbag Disposal ..............................................55

Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................56
Remote Control .............................................56
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................6 2

Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................16

MyKey™

At a Glance

Principle of Operation .................................63
Creating a MyKey ..........................................64
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................65
Checking MyKey System Status ..............65
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................65
MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................65

Instrument Panel Overview ........................17

Child Safety
General Information ......................................19
Installing Child Restraints ..........................20
Booster Seats .................................................32
Child Restraint Positioning ........................34
Child Safety Locks ........................................35

Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................67
Keyless Entry ...................................................70

Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................37
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................38
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................42
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................42
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................43
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ...............................................44
Seatbelt Extension .......................................45

Tailgate
Tailgate Lock ....................................................72
Removing the Tailgate .................................72
Tailgate Step ...................................................73
Bed Extender ...................................................74

Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................76
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................78

1

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Global Opening .............................................99
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................99
Interior Mirror ..................................................101
Sliding Windows ..........................................102
Sun Visors .......................................................102
Moonroof ........................................................103

Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards ..................80

Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................82
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................82
Audio Control ..................................................83
Voice Control ..................................................84
Cruise Control ................................................84
Information Display Control ......................85
Heated Steering Wheel ..............................85

Instrument Cluster
Gauges ............................................................105
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............108
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............112

Information Displays
General Information ....................................113
Information Messages ...............................129

Pedals

Climate Control

Adjusting the Pedals ...................................86

Manual Climate Control ...........................146
Automatic Climate Control ......................147
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
.........................................................................149
Heated Rear Window .................................152
Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................152
Cabin Air Filter ...............................................152
Remote Start .................................................152

Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers ........................................87
Autowipers .......................................................87
Windshield Washers ....................................88

Lighting
General Information ....................................89
Lighting Control .............................................89
Autolamps .......................................................90
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................90
Daytime Running Lamps .............................91
Automatic High Beam Control .................92
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................93
Direction Indicators ......................................93
Spot Lamps .....................................................93
Interior Lamps ................................................94
Ambient Lighting ...........................................97
Cargo Lamps ...................................................97

Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................154
Head Restraints ...........................................154
Manual Seats ................................................156
Power Seats ...................................................157
Memory Function ........................................159
Rear Seats .......................................................161
Heated Seats .................................................162
Climate Controlled Seats .........................163
Front Seat Armrest .....................................164
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................165

Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows ............................................98

2

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Table of Contents

Universal Garage Door Opener ..............166

Selective Catalytic Reductant System Diesel ...........................................................198
Diesel Particulate Filter ............................202

Auxiliary Power Points

Transmission

Universal Garage Door Opener

Automatic Transmission .........................208
Power Take-Off ............................................213

Auxiliary Power Points ...............................170

Storage Compartments

Four-Wheel Drive

Center Console ..............................................172
Overhead Console .......................................172
Under Seat Storage .....................................172

Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................214

Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential ............................223
Electronic Locking Differential ...............223

Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ....................................175
Ignition Switch ..............................................175
Keyless Starting ............................................176
Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/6.8L
.........................................................................176
Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L Diesel
.........................................................................178
Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L Diesel
.........................................................................183
Engine Idle Shutdown ................................183
Engine Block Heater ...................................183

Principle of Operation ...............................229
Using Traction Control ..............................229

Fuel and Refueling

Stability Control

Safety Precautions .....................................185
Fuel Quality - E85 .......................................186
Fuel Quality - Diesel ...................................187
Fuel Quality - Gasoline .............................189
Running Out of Fuel ...................................190
Refueling - Gasoline ...................................190
Refueling - Diesel .........................................191
Fuel Consumption .......................................193

Principle of Operation ...............................230
Using Stability Control ...............................231

Brakes
General Information ..................................225
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................227
Parking Brake ................................................227
Hill Start Assist .............................................227

Traction Control

Terrain Control
Principle of Operation ...............................233
Using Hill Descent Control ......................233

Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ...............................235
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................235
Rear View Camera ......................................236
360 Degree Camera ..................................239

Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................195
Catalytic Converter .....................................196

3

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Cruise Control

Customer Assistance

Principle of Operation ...............................243
Using Cruise Control ..................................243
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ..............244

Getting the Services You Need ..............310
In California (U.S. Only) ..............................311
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ......................312
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) .......................313
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada ........................................................313
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
.........................................................................314
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
.........................................................................315
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
.........................................................................315

Driving Aids
Lane Keeping System ...............................250
Blind Spot Information System .............252
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................257
Steering ..........................................................259
Collision Warning System ........................261

Load Carrying
Load Limit .....................................................264
Bed Ramps ...................................................268

Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart ...........................317
Changing a Fuse .........................................326

Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................272
Trailer Reversing Aids ................................274
Trailer Sway Control ...................................281
Recommended Towing Weights ..........282
Essential Towing Checks .........................286
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .....295

Maintenance
General Information ..................................328
Opening and Closing the Hood .............328
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L ..................329
Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Diesel .....330
Under Hood Overview - 6.8L ...................331
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L/6.8L ..............333
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel ............333
Engine Oil Check - 6.2L/6.8L ..................333
Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel ...............334
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
........................................................................335
Changing the Crankcase Vent Filter
Element ......................................................336
Oil Change Indicator Reset ......................337
Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L/6.8L .......338
Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Diesel ......342
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................346
Transfer Case Fluid Check ......................349
Brake Fluid Check .......................................349

Driving Hints
Breaking-In ...................................................298
Economical Driving ....................................298
Driving Through Water .............................299
Floor Mats .....................................................299
Snowplowing ...............................................300

Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance .................................303
Hazard Flashers ..........................................304
Fuel Shutoff .................................................304
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................305
Post-Crash Alert System .........................307
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................307
Towing Points ..............................................308

4

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Power Steering Fluid Check ...................350
Washer Fluid Check ...................................350
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L
Diesel ............................................................351
Fuel Filter - 6.2L/6.8L ................................352
Changing the 12V Battery ........................353
Checking the Wiper Blades .....................355
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................355
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................355
Changing a Bulb ..........................................357
Bulb Specification Chart .........................360
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L/6.8L
........................................................................362
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
Diesel ..........................................................363
Changing the Engine-Mounted and
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel
Filters - 6.7L Diesel .................................365

Changing a Road Wheel .........................408
Technical Specifications ..........................418

Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 6.2L ..................420
Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel ......420
Engine Specifications - 6.8L ....................421
Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L .............................422
Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel ................423
Motorcraft Parts - 6.8L .............................424
Vehicle Identification Number ...............425
Vehicle Certification Label ......................426
Transmission Code Designation ...........426
Capacities and Specifications - 6.2L
........................................................................427
Capacities and Specifications - 6.7L
Diesel ...........................................................432
Capacities and Specifications - 6.8L
........................................................................439

Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................370
Cleaning Products ......................................370
Cleaning the Exterior .................................370
Waxing ..............................................................371
Cleaning the Engine ...................................372
Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel .......372
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................373
Cleaning the Interior ...................................373
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens .......................375
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................375
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............377
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................377
Vehicle Storage ............................................377

Audio System
General Information ..................................445
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM .....446
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC ..........................................................448
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Touchscreen Display .............................453
Digital Radio .................................................454
Satellite Radio .............................................456
USB Port ........................................................459

SYNC™
General Information .................................460
Using Voice Recognition ..........................462
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ..........464
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......476
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
.........................................................................481
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................490

Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................380
Tire Care .........................................................382
Using Snow Chains ...................................400
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........400

5

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Table of Contents
SYNC™ 3
General Information .................................498
Home Screen ...............................................509
Using Voice Recognition ...........................510
Entertainment ...............................................517
Climate ............................................................527
Phone ..............................................................529
Navigation .....................................................535
Apps ................................................................543
Settings ..........................................................546
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................560

Accessories
Accessories ...................................................574
Auxiliary Switches ......................................575

Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................579

Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information .......581
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........584
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................589
Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........598

Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ............609
End User License Agreement ..................611
Type Approvals ............................................637

6

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
Note: Your vehicle’s powertrain control
systems can detect and store information
about vehicle modifications that increase
horsepower and torque output such as
whether or not performance-enhancing
powertrain components commonly referred
to as performance chips have been used.
This information will stay in the system’s
memory and cannot be erased even if the
modification is removed. Ford Motor
Company, Ford of Canada, Ford of Mexico
and service or repair facilities can retrieve
this information when servicing your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company may use this
information to determine if your warranty
covers any needed repairs.

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Note: Some aftermarket products may
cause severe engine, transmission and
exhaust system damage. See your warranty
information for more details.
Your new diesel engine may feel, drive and
function somewhat differently than a
gasoline engine. Therefore, it is very
important that you read and thoroughly
familiarize yourself and others operating
the vehicle with this guide. There is a
special procedure for turning off the diesel
engine. See Starting a Diesel Engine
(page 178). It is important to read and
understand this material in order to
maintain the best service life for your
engine.

Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options that are not on your
vehicle. It is possible that either Ford Motor
Company or an authorized Ford dealer may
have originally sold an incomplete vehicle
to a vehicle modifier who upfitted it. As a
result, some of the options and features on
this vehicle may differ from what we
describe in this manual.

Ford may discontinue models or change
specifications without any notice and
without incurring obligations.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so they may appear
differently to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.

7

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system

E270480

Cabin air filter
E154903

Check fuel cap
A

Right-hand side

B

Left-hand side

Child safety door lock or unlock

Note: Throughout this guide, you will find
warnings identified by the warning symbol.
Warnings remind you to be especially
careful to reduce the risk of personal injury.

Child seat lower anchor

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

Child seat tether anchor

These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.

Cruise control

Air conditioning system
E71340

Do not open when hot

E162384

E231157

Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Engine air filter

Anti-lock braking system

Engine coolant

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Engine coolant temperature

Battery

Engine oil

Battery acid

Explosive gas

8

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
Fan warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Fasten seatbelt

Note operating instructions

E71880

Flammable

Horn control

E231160

E270945

Front airbag

Panic alarm

Front fog lamps

Parking aid

E67017

E139213

Fuel pump reset

Parking brake

Fuse compartment

Power steering fluid

Hazard flashers

Power windows front/rear

Heated rear window

Power window lockout

Windshield defrosting system

Requires registered technician
E231159

Interior luggage compartment
release

Safety alert

Jack

See Owner's Manual

Keep out of reach of children

See Service Manual
E231158

E161353

Lighting control

Service engine soon

Low tire pressure warning

Passenger airbag activated
E270849

9

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
Passenger airbag deactivated

as part suppliers that may help diagnose
malfunctions, and who are similarly
obligated to protect data. We retain this
data only as long as necessary to perform
these functions or to comply with law. We
may provide information where required
in response to official requests to law
enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with
lawful authority or court order, and such
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by Ford
Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 460).

E270850

Side airbag

Shield the eyes
E167012

Stability control
E138639

Windshield wiping system
E270969

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact
information), to offer you products or
services that may interest you. Data may
be provided to our service providers such

Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;

10

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.

The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.

Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 460).

This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want

To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
11

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 460).

For more information visit:
Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

FORD CREDIT

WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us, and to manage your
account.

Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.

Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to Account Manager, go to
www.ford.com/finance.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION

PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.

We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.

12

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs

Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle has
sophisticated electronic controls.

One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.

WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.

Collision Repairs

Never place front seat mounted
rear-facing child or infant seats in
front of an active passenger airbag.

We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.

On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING
Do not connect wireless plug-in
devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.

Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.

Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.

SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
see the Warranty Guide that is provided to
you along with your Owner’s Manual.

13

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
Using your Vehicle With a
Snowplow

If your vehicle has the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package, it will be indicated
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is on the driver side door
pillar or on the rear edge of the driver door.
You can determine whether the
ambulance manufacturer followed Ford’s
recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer. The Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package is only available on
certain diesel engine equipped vehicles.

More information and guidelines for using
your vehicle with a snowplow are in this
Owner's Manual. See Snowplowing (page
300).

Using a Slide-In Camper
For information regarding the use of
slide-in campers, consult the Truck
Camper Loading document supplied with
your vehicle.

Using your Vehicle as a Stationary
Power Source

Using your Vehicle as an
Ambulance

Information and guidelines for operating a
vehicle with an aftermarket power take-off
system are in this Owner's Manual. See
Power Take-Off (page 213).

If your light truck has the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package, it may be utilized as
an ambulance. We urge ambulance
manufacturers to follow the
recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s
Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle
Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as
pertinent supplements. For additional
information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at
http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/
and then by selecting Contact Us or by
phone at 1–877–840–4338.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Use of your Ford light truck as an
ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package voids the Ford New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void
the emissions warranties. In addition,
ambulance usage without the preparation
package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a
risk of spraying fuel which could lead to
fires.

Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in

14

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Introduction
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.

15

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor
Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address

www.sustainability.ford.com

16

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

E251634

A

Direction indicators. See
Direction Indicators (page 93).

H

Audio. See Audio System
(page 445).

B

Wiper lever. See Wipers and
Washers (page 87).

I

Climate control. See Climate
Control (page 146).

C

Information display controls.
See Information Displays
(page 113).

J

Rear defrost.

K

Start button. See Keyless
Starting (page 176).

D

Instrument cluster. See
Instrument Cluster (page 105).

L

Voice control. See Voice
Control (page 84).

E

Navigation, media, phone.

M

Horn.

F

Entertainment display.

N

G

Hazard flasher switch. See
Hazard Flashers (page 304).

Cruise control. See Cruise
Control (page 243).

O

Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 82).

17

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

At a Glance
P

Parking brake release. See
Brakes (page 225).

Q

Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 89).

18

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.

See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety

On hot days, the temperature inside
the vehicle can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.

19

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child

Child size, height, weight, or age

Recommended restraint
type

Infants or
toddlers

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).

Small children

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).

Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
Larger children
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).

•

•

•

You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.

Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.

INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats

E142594

20

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
•

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

•

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Except Front Center Position of
Super Cab and Crew Cab)

Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.

Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:

WARNINGS
Do not place a rearward facing child
restraint in front of an active airbag.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.

Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.

E142528

1.

When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
restraint and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E142529

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.

21

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety

E142530

E142875

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.

E142533

22

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Front Center Position of Super
Cab and Crew Cab)

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle helps to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

WARNINGS
Do not place a rearward facing child
restraint in front of an active airbag.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
Always use both the lap and
shoulder portion of the seatbelt in
the center seating position.
The belt webbing below the tongue is the
lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt. The belt webbing above the
tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.

E142534

10.

Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.

E142528

1.

To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.

Position the child safety seat in the
front center seat.

We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
E162708

23

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.

E142533

5. While pushing down with your knee on
the child restraint, pull up on the
shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap
belt portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and
remove any slack in the belt to securely
tighten the child safety seat in the
vehicle.
7. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

E142530

3. While holding both shoulder and lap
portions next to the tongue, route the
tongue and webbing through the child
restraint according to the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions. Be sure
that the belt webbing is not twisted.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.

E142534

8. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.

24

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.

2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.

We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.

Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear
Seat Outboard Positions) (If Equipped)

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.

E142528

1.

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E146523

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.

E146522

25

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
7.

Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E146524

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.

E146525

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.

26

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
E142534

10.

The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the vehicle seat backrest and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
one top tether anchor behind that seating
position.

Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.

LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the
lower anchors are not used. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if a top tether
strap has been provided with your child
restraint.

We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Do not attach two child safety
restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the following
seating positions (LATCH is not available
on Regular Cab):

27

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab

E166694

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors
from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.

E166695

The lower LATCH anchors are at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat backrest. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions to
properly install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.

The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 26 in
(652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child restraints (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit use with the anchor
spacing stated. Do not attach a child
restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child restraint is attached to that anchor.

Follow the instructions later in this chapter
on attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.

28

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a proper installation.

The passenger seats of your vehicle may
have built-in tether strap anchors behind
the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
loops of webbing above the seat backrest
or an anchor bracket behind the seat on
the rear edge of the seat cushion.
The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super
Cab has three straps along the top of the
seat backrest that function as both routing
loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.

Combining Seatbelt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):

When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.

Regular Cab

Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.

E166696

E251549

29

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab

E251550

2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position. You may
need to pull the seat backrest forward
to access the tether anchors. Make sure
the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child restraint.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.

Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap just snug without lifting the front of
the child restraint. Keeping the child
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.

Regular Cab passenger and center
seats (located on back panel)

Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the seatbelt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.

Front Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Regular Cab)
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether
strap over the top of the seatback.
1.

E175295

If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.

Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat and under the
head restraint.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
30

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.

Rear Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Crew Cab and Super
Cab)

E162715

1.

Route the vehicle tether loop between
the head restraint posts, then route the
child seat tether strap through the loop,
forward of the head restraint.
2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether
anchor loop in the adjacent seating
position. If using the driver side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt for
the center seat. Always put the tether
strap through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post holds the
child restraint tightly, but the head
restraint post is not strong enough to
hold the child restraint during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.

E167009

There are three loops of webbing just
above the back of the rear seat (along the
bottom edge of the rear window). Use
these loops as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child safety
seat tether straps.
For example, you can use the center loop
as a routing loop for a child safety seat in
the center rear seat and as an anchoring
loop for child restraints installed in the
outboard rear seats.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.

Many tether straps cannot be tightened if
the tether strap is hooked to the loop
directly behind the child restraint.

If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.

To provide a tight tether strap:

31

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
•

BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Do not put the shoulder section of
the seatbelt or allow the child to put
the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.

•
•
•
•

Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.

Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?

Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they
reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:

E68924

•

Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.

E142595

32

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.

E70710

•

High back booster seats

E142596

E142597

33

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.

WARNINGS
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.

CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING

Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.

WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.

Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.

Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in

To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.

34

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Child Safety

Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X

Restraint
Type

Combined
weight of
child and
child seat

LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)

LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)

Rear facing Up to 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)

Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt
and LATCH
only
and top
(lower
tether
anchors
anchor
and top
tether
anchor)

X

X

Rear facing Over 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat

Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Forward
facing
child seat

Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

X

X

Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
154).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.

E112197

35

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

X

X

X

X

Child Safety
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.

Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.

36

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.

WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with the
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.

Seatbelts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.

To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash
which may result in serious injury or death.

Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear seatbelts for optimum
protection in an accident.

All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.

All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seatbelt properly.

The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.

E71880

Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific seatbelt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the seatbelt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.

•

Seatbelt warning light and chime.

E67017

•

37

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.

Seatbelts
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the seatbelts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the seatbelt pretensioners
activate when the Safety Canopy is
activated.

FASTENING THE SEATBELTS

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.

Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.

Using the Seatbelt with Cinch
Tongue (Front Center Seat on
Super Cab and Crew Cab)
The cinch tongue slides up and down the
belt webbing when you stow the belt or
while putting seatbelts on. When you
buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt, the
cinch tongue allows you to shorten the lap
portion, but pinches the webbing to keep
the lap portion from getting longer. The
cinch tongue is designed to slip during a
crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
either the lap or shoulder portions.

E142587

1.

Before you can reach and latch a lap and
shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it.

Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.

38

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the
lap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongue
adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle
receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the seatbelt will become locked and
help reduce your forward movement.

Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and properly fasten
your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.

E162708

1.

To lengthen the lap belt, pull some
webbing out of the shoulder belt
retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below the
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion)
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.

Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
1.

Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the
retractor so that the shoulder belt
portion of the seatbelt crosses your
shoulder and chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the
belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for your seating position until
you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.

E142590

Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.

39

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
Seatbelt Locking Modes

When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode

WARNING

Use this mode any time you install a child
safety seat in a front outboard passenger
seating position in a Regular Cab,
SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating
position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
optional front seat's center seatbelt has a
cinch mechanism. Properly restrain
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seat whenever possible. See Child Safety
(page 19).

If your vehicle is involved in a crash,
have the seatbelts and associated
components inspected as soon as
possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:

How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable seatbelts

Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,
turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.

E142591

1.

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.

Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.

40

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts
(second row only– if equipped)

The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
• Impact sensors in various parts of the
vehicle.

E146363

1.

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire
belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.

How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?

How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode

WARNING

Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING

The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

41

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E146364

During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.

E145664

Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E146365

To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1.

Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.

The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.

SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME

The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,
rollovers and some side impact crashes.
The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt
did not inflate in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.

This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
E71880
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.

42

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
If

Then

The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posithe warning chime sounds for a few
tion...
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...

The seatbelt warning light and warning
chime turn off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...

The seatbelt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.

SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function. It provides additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the seatbelt
warning light when you are in the driver
seat and a seatbelt is unbuckled.
If...

Then...

You buckle your seatbelt before you switch
the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.

The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
You do not buckle your seatbelt before your
seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h)
and 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the warning tone sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about five
ignition on...
minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.
The driver seatbelt is unbuckled for about
The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
one minute while the vehicle is traveling at seatbelt warning light illuminates and the
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 warning tone sounds for six seconds every
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
25 seconds, repeating for about five
on...
minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.

43

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature (Driver only)

4. While the seatbelt warning light is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This will switch the feature on if it is
currently off.

WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury,
do not deactivate or activate the system
while driving the vehicle.

CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.

Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled,
it will be re-enabled during the use of
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 63).
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• All vehicle doors are closed.
• The driver seatbelt is unbuckled.

Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.

1.

Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light
turns off (about one minute). You must
complete Step 3 within 30 seconds
after the seatbelt warning light turns
off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt
three times at a moderate speed,
ending with the seatbelt in the
unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
seatbelt warning light turns on.

Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 370).

44

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seatbelts
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Ford Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an
extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
Never use seatbelt extensions to
install child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over
the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.

45

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.

All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.

The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.

Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.

While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To avoid risk
of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.

Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.

If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.

46

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS

Passenger Airbag On and Off
Switch (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.

WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
seat is installed all the way back.

The front passenger airbag is not
designed to offer protection to an
occupant in the center seating
position.
Your vehicle may have an airbag
deactivation switch. Before driving,
always look at the switch to make
sure it is in the appropriate position. Failure
to put the switch in the proper position can
increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a crash.

E151127

E181984

The driver and front passenger airbags
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.

High-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has indicators that illuminate,
indicating that the front passenger frontal
airbag is either on or off. The indicator lamp
is near the center of the instrument panel.

The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 54).

Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON lamps illuminate for a short
period of time when you switch the ignition
on to confirm it is functional.

47

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System

Switch position

Passenger airbag status
indicator

Passenger airbag

Off

OFF: Lit

Disabled

ON: Unlit
On

OFF: Unlit

Enabled

ON: Lit
WARNINGS
If your vehicle has rear seats, always
transport children who are 12 and
younger in the rear seat. Always use
seatbelts and child restraints properly. Do
not place a child in a rear facing infant seat
in the front seat unless your vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on and off switch
and the passenger airbag is turned off. This
is because the back of the infant seat is
too close to the inflating airbag and the
risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
airbag inflates is substantial.

E229376

Low-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has an indicator that illuminates
and stays lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is off. The
indicator lamp is near the center of the
instrument panel.

The passenger airbag on and off switch is
in the glovebox.

Note: The indicator lamp illuminates for a
short period of time when you switch the
ignition on to confirm it is functional.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNINGS
If the light does not illuminate when
the passenger airbag switch is off
and you switch the ignition on, have
the passenger airbag switch serviced
immediately by a qualified technician.
To avoid switching on the airbag,
always remove the ignition key with
the switch in the off position.
E181522

48

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
1.

Insert the ignition key, turn the switch
to OFF and hold in OFF while removing
the key.
2. When you switch the ignition on, the
passenger airbag off light illuminates
briefly, momentarily shuts off and then
turns back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.

The passenger airbag remains off until you
turn it back on.

Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNINGS
The seatbelts for the driver and right
front passenger seating positions are
specifically designed to operate
together with the airbags in certain types
of crashes. When you switch off your
airbag, you not only lose the protection of
the airbag, you also may reduce the
effectiveness of your seatbelt system. If
the passenger does not meet the
requirements stated in the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration or
Transport Canada deactivation criteria,
switching off the airbag can increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a crash.

E181521

1.

Insert the ignition key and turn the
switch to ON.
2. The passenger airbag off light will
briefly illuminate when you switch the
ignition on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is operational.
The passenger side airbag should always
be on (the passenger airbag off light
should not be illuminated) unless the
passenger is a person who meets the
requirements stated either in Category 1, 2
or 3 of the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria which follows.

If your vehicle has rear seats, always
transport children who are 12 and
younger in the rear seat. Always use
seatbelts and child restraints properly. Do
not place a child in a rear facing infant seat
in the front seat unless your vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on and off switch
and the passenger airbag is turned off. This
is because the back of the infant seat is
too close to the inflating airbag and the
risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
airbag inflates is substantial.

The vast majority of drivers and passengers
are much safer with an airbag than
without. To do their job and reduce the risk
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
pose a potentially deadly risk in some
situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The
most effective way to reduce the risk of
unnecessary airbag injuries without
reducing the overall safety of the vehicle
is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the

If the passenger airbag off light is
illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is on and the ignition
is on, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced immediately by a qualified
technician.

49

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
•
•

front seat. This provides the protection of
seatbelts and permits the airbags to
provide the additional protection they were
designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the
very significant risk reducing benefits of
the airbag and you are also reducing the
effectiveness of the seatbelts, because
seatbelts in modern vehicles are designed
to work as a safety system with the
airbags.

•

The vehicle has no rear seat;
The vehicle has a rear seat too small
to accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.

2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:

National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada)

•
•

WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management seatbelts for the driver
and right front passenger. These
particular seatbelts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management seatbelt gives or
releases additional seatbelt webbing in
some accidents to reduce the
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and to reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is off, this energy
management seatbelt might permit the
passenger wearing the seatbelt to move
forward enough to have a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk.
Make sure the airbag is on for any
passenger who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.

•

The vehicle has no rear seat;
Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in
the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of the
vehicle; or
The child has a medical condition
which, according to the child's
physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.

3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
•
•

1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:

50

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Causes the passenger airbag to pose
a special risk for the passenger;
Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.

Supplementary Restraints System
•
•

Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria
(Canada Only)
WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management seatbelts for the driver
and right front passenger. These
particular seatbelts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management seatbelt gives or
releases additional seatbelt webbing in
some accidents to reduce the
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and to reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is off, this energy
management seatbelt might permit the
passenger wearing the seatbelt to move
forward enough to have a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk.
Make sure the airbag is on for any
passenger who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.

•

3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
medical condition that, according to his or
her physician:
•
•

•

Poses a special risk for the passenger
if the airbag deploys; and
Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag deployment greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and experiencing a crash
without the protection offered by the
airbag

Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment

1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
•
•

My vehicle has no rear seat;
Although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
children age 12 and under have no
option but to sometimes ride in the
front seat because rear seat space is
insufficient;
The child has a medical condition that,
according to the child's physician,
makes it necessary for the child to ride
in the front seat so that the driver can
monitor the child's condition.

WARNING

My vehicle has no rear seat;
The rear seat in my vehicle cannot
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat;
The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that
the driver can monitor the infant's
condition.

National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.

2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or
under must ride in the front seat because:

51

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should not incur
risk of serious injury from the airbags.

After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.

SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.

Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
seat is installed all the way back.

Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

E142846

If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.

Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.

52

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.

SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.

E152533

The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found
on your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the
seatback of the driver and front
passenger seats.

To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.

·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 54).

If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.

The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be

53

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.

The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.

E75004

The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment

Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module which deploys (activates) the
front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted
side airbags, and the Safety Canopy®.
Based on the type of crash (frontal impact,
side impact or rollover), the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate
safety devices.

· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
E67017
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 54).

The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
105). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.

Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.

A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:

54

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System

E67017

•
•

The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.

•

The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.

•

If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.

The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.

The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.

55

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES

Note: If you are in range, the remote control
still operates if you press any button
unintentionally.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of the front
exterior door handle within 3 ft (1 m)
proximity of an intelligent access key.
• You press the tailgate release button.
• You press a button on the remote
control.

Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the remote
control battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote Control
(page 56).

The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.

REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If

Other short-distance radio transmitters,
such as amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote
controls and alarm systems may operate
on the same frequency as your remote
control. If other transmitters are operating
on those frequencies, you may not be able
to use your remote control. Using your
remote control near some types of
electronic equipment, such as USB devices,
computers or cell phones can interfere with
remote operation. Operating your remote
control near metal or metallic-finished
purses, bags or clothing can interfere with
remote operation. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.

Equipped)

Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.

56

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

E191532

Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.

E226461

The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
Removable Key Blade

E151795

The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.

57

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
113).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.

E226462

Press the release button and pull the key
blade out.

E191533

1.

Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.

E151799

3. Carefully remove the cover.

Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.

58

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

E151800

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown to
release the battery.

E226462

1.

E151801

5. Remove the battery.
6. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
7. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.

59

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Press the release button and pull the
key blade out.

Keys and Remote Controls

E218402

3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.

E218401

2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory positions.
Press the unlock button on a linked remote
control to recall memory positions. If you
enable the easy entry and exit feature, the
seat moves to the easy entry position. The
seat moves to the driver memory position
when you switch the ignition on.
Linking a Preset Position to your
Remote Control
See Memory Function (page 159).

60

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Car Finder

The remote start system does not work if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon light is on.

Press the button twice within
three seconds. A tone sounds
E138623
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.

Sounding the Panic Alarm

E138624

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to

Remote Control Feedback

turn it off.

An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.

Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.

Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
E138625

This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.

LED

Status

Solid green

Remote start or
extension
successful

Solid red

Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off

Blinking red

Remote start or
stop failed

Blinking green

Waiting for status
update

Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other.

You can configure vehicles with automatic
climate control to turn on the automatic
climate control when you remote start your
vehicle. See Automatic Climate Control
(page 147). A manual climate control
system runs at the setting you set it to
when you switched your vehicle off.
Many states and provinces restrict the use
of remote start. Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.

E138626

61

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.

Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.

To remote start your vehicle:

Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting

1. Press the lock button.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.

Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
E138625

You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.

The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs
the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch it on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 113).

You can turn the remote start system on
or off using the information display. See
General Information (page 113).

Note: If you do not follow this sequence,
your vehicle does not start remotely, the
direction indicators do not flash twice and
the horn does not sound.

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL

Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch on the ignition before driving your
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the push button ignition switch on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.

Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 76).

The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the remote start up to a maximum of 35
minutes.

62

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

•

MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.

•

You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
•

After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.

Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
when you use the MyKey system. For
example, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning or forward collision
warning.
Restricted touchscreen operation in
some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.

Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch
the lane departure warning feature off, but
this feature turns back on automatically
with every new key cycle.
Note: MyKey drivers can turn on the forward
collision warning when it is turned off by an
admin key.

Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.

Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
radio or a very basic audio system, then the
radio may not mute.

Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.

Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.

Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the
following settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.

Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing
choices to switch them on or off, or to select
a more specific setting.

63

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

MyKey™
•

Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.

CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey.
1.

Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
If your vehicle has a push-button start,
place the transmitter into the backup
slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 76).
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin
programming your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 113).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close driver door and restart
your vehicle with the programmed key
or transmitter.
Note: Make sure you label the programmed
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.

WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
•

•

•

Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's
control to switch it off.

You can also program the optional MyKey
settings.

Programming or Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your optional MyKey settings.
1.

Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 113).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.

Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
radio or a very basic audio system, then the
radio may not mute.

64

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

MyKey™
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close the driver door and
restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch the engine off, you must use an
admin key to change or clear your optional
MyKey settings.

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 113).

MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the information display.

Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
all MyKeys have been deleted.

1.

Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin clearing
your MyKey programming. See
Information Displays (page 113).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually.

Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING

65

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

MyKey™

Condition

I cannot create a MyKey.

Potential causes

· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup slot.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
76).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.

I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 64).
For vehicles with keyless start: No MyKey
· An admin transmitter is present when you
restrictions are available when starting the started your vehicle.
vehicle.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 64).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.

· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 64).

I lost the only admin key.

· Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.

I lost a key.

· Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
76).

MyKey distances do not accumulate.

· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.

66

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows your entire vehicle to unlock with
one press of the button.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your doors and tailgate. See Tailgate
(page 72).

Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks
your entire vehicle when you disable
two-stage unlocking.

Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.

Locking the Vehicle

E138623

Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
flash.

Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors are closed.

E138628

A

Unlock.

Mislock

B

Lock.

If any door is open, or if the hood is open
on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn sounds twice and
the direction indicators do not flash.

Remote Control (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running.

Activating Intelligent Access (If

Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage
Unlock)

General Information

Equipped)

You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.

Press the button to unlock the
driver door. Press the button
E138629
again within three seconds to
unlock all doors. The direction indicators
flash. The direction indicators flash twice
to confirm the change. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.

The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies are jammed.

67

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Note: The system may not function if the
key is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.

At the Electronic Tailgate (If Equipped)

Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 56).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access

E187693

E248555

Press the exterior tailgate release button
inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate
unlocks and opens. See Tailgate Lock
(page 72).

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.

Smart Unlock (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
If you leave your key in the ignition, when
you open the driver door and lock your
vehicle with the power door lock control,
the doors lock then unlock.

Locking Using Intelligent Access

You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
• Using the manual lock on the inside of
the door.
• Locking the driver door with a key.
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Using the lock button on the remote
control.

E248556

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.

Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.

Note: Do not use the outside door handle
as a roof cargo strap.

68

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Autounlock

When you lock your vehicle using the
power door lock control (with the door
open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your
vehicle searches for an intelligent access
key in the passenger compartment after
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a
key, all of the doors immediately unlock.

Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.

In order to override the smart unlock
feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside your vehicle,
you can lock your vehicle after all doors
are closed by using the keyless entry
keypad, pressing the lock button on
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.

Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.

When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if the
ignition is on.

Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 113).

Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.

Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).

The dome lamp does not turn on if the
control is set to the off position.
The lights do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the dimmer
control.
• Any door is open.

69

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Battery Saver

You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own five-digit personal entry
codes.

The battery saver turns off the interior
lamps 30 minutes after you switch off the
ignition if a door is open and the dome
lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior
lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp
switch is off.

Programming a Personal Entry Code

Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)

To create your own personal entry code:

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD

1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code one.

The keypad is near the driver window and
illuminates when you touch it.

The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.

Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.

To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.

If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after
you close all of the doors.

KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)

Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
E190936

Erasing a Personal Code

You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.

1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.

70

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See General
Information (page 113).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.

71

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Tailgate (If Equipped)
TAILGATE LOCK (If Equipped)
The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of
the tailgate.

E248384

2. Locate and disconnect the frame
connections. They are on the left-hand
side of the vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle may have up to three
frame connections.

E224958

Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.
Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn
it to the right to unlock the tailgate.

3. Install the caps from the tailgate
removal kit on the in-line connectors
that remain on the vehicle.
Note: If you do not install the caps on the
connectors, some features may not operate
as intended.

REMOVING THE TAILGATE
WARNING

4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the bumper and place it out of the way.
5. Lower the tailgate.

Always properly secure cargo to
prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling
from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
You can remove the tailgate for more
loading room.
1.

Obtain the tailgate removal kit from
the glove box.

E163092

6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.

72

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Tailgate (If Equipped)
7. Disconnect the other cable.
8. Lift the tailgate to a 45 degree angle
from horizontal.
9. Lift the right side off its hinge.
10. Lift the tailgate to an 80 degree angle
from horizontal.
11.
Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
E187718

TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)

3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
to its lowest position.

Use the step to make entering the truck
bed easier.
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
• Always open the step panel to widen
the step.
• Always use the grab handle when
climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load, you plus the load,
below 350 lb (159 kg).

E189557

4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal
to vertical until you hear a click. You
have locked the handle in place.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.

Opening the Step
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Do not
drive with the step or grab handle open.

Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears as worn or
damaged.

1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step pops out
slightly.

73

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Tailgate (If Equipped)
Closing the Step

1.

1.

Press the yellow button on the
telescoping handle to lower the handle,
then press the yellow lever at the
bottom of the handle to unlock the
handle. Rotate the handle down from
vertical to horizontal and push it into
the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.

BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)

Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.

E163096

2. Open the latches to release the panels.

Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 pounds (68
kilograms) on the tailgate when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.

E163097

3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.

Tailgate mode

E163095

E163098

74

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Tailgate (If Equipped)
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.

E163099

5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into
the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.

Grocery mode

E163100

Follow Steps 1-4 of the tailgate mode
instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.

75

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Security
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts your
vehicle, as well as a remote control.

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in engine
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.

The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and turns on the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may result in vehicle starting
problems, especially if they are too close to
the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent
these objects from touching the coded key
when starting your vehicle. Switch the
ignition off, move all objects on the key
chain away from the coded key and restart
your vehicle if a problem occurs.

If your coded keys are lost or stolen and
you do not have an extra coded key, you
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.

Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter

SecuriLock®

Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle. All six can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.

The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.

You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
This procedure programs both the vehicle
immobilizer keycode and the remote
control to your vehicle.

If you are unable to start your vehicle with
a coded key, it is not operating correctly.
A message may appear in the information
display.

Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.

Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming

Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.

The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.

1.

Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.

76

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.

Security
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds,
but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After at least 3 seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds,
but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After at least 3 seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.

This procedure programs both the vehicle
immobilizer keycode and the remote
control to your vehicle.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access key readily accessible.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Carry out all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you carry
out any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.

If you have successfully programmed the
new integrated keyhead transmitter, it will
start your vehicle and operate the remote
entry system.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 9. If
you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: Do not place the device on the
wireless accessory charging area when
programming intelligent access keys.
Note: You can program a maximum of six
keys to your vehicle. All six must be
intelligent access keys.

77

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Security
Type One

2. Remove the tray and the cover from
the center console. With the buttons
facing upward, place the first intelligent
access key in the backup slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If
you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer.

E226701

Type Two

ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The active anti-theft system is designed
to warn you in the event of unauthorized
vehicle entry and is also designed to help
prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by
arming the system in different ways. See
Information Displays (page 113).
The direction indicators flash and the horn
sounds if the system triggers while the
alarm is armed.

E269950

1.

Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.

Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.

78

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Security
Using the System

The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.

You can select two levels of alarm security.
You can change the level of security
through the information display. See
General Information (page 113).

Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad. If
equipped with intelligent access, you
can use the unlock sensor on the
exterior door handle. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 67).
• Switch the ignition on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door lock
cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
switch the ignition on within 12
seconds.

Reduced Guard (If Equipped)
Reduced guard monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
Full Guard (If Equipped)
Full guard monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Movement inside your vehicle.
• Change in vehicle inclination, for
example, unwanted towing.
Note: Do not choose full monitor mode
when the vehicle is in transport or if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur.

Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control stops the horn and direction
indicators, but does not disarm the system.

Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure you
close all the windows prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences.
Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system does not arm if any door is ajar.

Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
using the remote control or keyless entry
keypad. You can also lock your vehicle
using the lock sensor on the exterior door
handle if your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 67).

79

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
Automatic Power Deploy

USING POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the
running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
Switch off the running boards before
jacking or placing any object under
your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.

E166682

The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door.
This can help you enter and exit your
vehicle.

Automatic Power Stow
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.

When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after
a two-second delay.

Manual Power Deploy

Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures.

You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display.

Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select Settings.
Select Advanced Settings.
Select Vehicle.
Select Power Running Boards.
Select your desired power running
board setting.

Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).

80

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display.
•

•

When disabled, the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
When enabled, the running boards
move back to the correct positions
based on the door position.

Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.

81

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 154).

E261503

3. Lock the steering column.

ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
E261502

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 154).

1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.

82

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Steering Wheel
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 159).
E261582

Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.

Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature

To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.

The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 113).

End of Travel Position

Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.

The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.

AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:

To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1.

Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.

83

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Steering Wheel
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)

E191327

A

Volume up.

B

Media.

C

Seek up or next.

D

Volume down.

E

Seek down or previous.

E191328

Media

A

Mute.

B

Voice recognition.

C

End call.

D

Answer or make a call.

See your SYNC information.

Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.

CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)

Seek, Next or Previous

Type One

Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
E191329

See Using Cruise Control (page 243).

84

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Steering Wheel
Type Two

Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.

E191337

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 244).

INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL

E191336

See Information Displays (page 113).

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)

Switch the heated steering wheel on and
off using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.

85

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Pedals (If Equipped)
Horizontal Control

ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the pedal adjustment
controls when your feet are on the
accelerator or brake pedal when the
vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).

A

Depending on your vehicle and equipment
level, the shape and location of your
power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
•

•

B

E162916

If your control is vertical, then it is to
the left of the steering column and on
the instrument panel.
If your control is horizontal, then it is on
the left side of the steering column.

A.

Farther.

B.

Closer.

Both horizontal and vertical controls
operate the same way:
1. Press and hold A to move the pedals
away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals
closer to you.

Vertical Control

You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 159).

E176213

A.

Farther.

B.

Closer.

86

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

Note: The courtesy wipe feature turns on
after using the windshield washers to
remove any excess washer fluid and debris.
You can adjust the courtesy wipe settings
in the instrument display.

Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.

Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.

E172817
E172816

•
•

Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.

Rotate away from you for a long wipe
interval.
Rotate toward you for a short wipe
interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.

AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.

87

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wipers and Washers
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.

E172818

•
•

•

A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.

A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.

88

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION

LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.

E142449

A

Off.

B

Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.

C

Headlamps.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.

Headlamp High Beam

Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E167827

Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.

89

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
Headlamp Flasher

The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.

E163268

Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.

The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.

AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
headlamps on in low visibility conditions,
for example daytime fog.

Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: When disconnecting the battery or
when it runs out of charge, the illuminated
components turn to the maximum setting.

E142451

When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.

90

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.

Type One - Conventional (NonConfigurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.

E231828

Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.

Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps

A

B

Type Two - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 113).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.

E165366

A

Press repeatedly or press and
hold to dim.

B

Press repeatedly or press and
hold to brighten.

The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.

91

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.

Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING

The high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.

The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns off high beams
before they can distract other road users.
Low beams remain on.

Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
113).

Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.

E142451

Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.

Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Autolamps
(page 90).
Overriding the System

A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.

When you switch on the high beams,
pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
temporary override to low beam.

92

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
Automatic High Beam Indicator (If

•

Equipped)

•

The indicator lamp illuminates
to confirm when the system is
ready to assist.

To operate the left direction indicator,
push the lever down until it stops.
To operate the right direction indicator,
push the lever up until it stops.

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.

FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)

SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped)
The spot lamps are on the forward-facing
side of the exterior mirrors. Switch on the
spot lamps by pressing the buttons above
the lighting control with the parking lamps
on.

E142453

Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on.

E176842

When switching on the spot lamps, the
area in front of and to the side of your
vehicle illuminates.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by
moving the position of the exterior mirrors.
For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim
of the lamps by folding the exterior mirrors
into or away from the windows. For
power-folding mirrors, use the switch on
the driver-side door.
Note: The spot lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
E163272

93

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps

INTERIOR LAMPS

(If Equipped)

The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.

The cargo lamps are in the central high
mounted stop lamp, and to either side of
the cargo box.
The trailer hookup lamp is on the tailgate
next to the handle.

Front Interior Lamps

Pressing the button in the
lighting control panel or the
E189587
button in the cargo box near the
lamp turns on both of these lamps.

Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each button on the overhead console
depends upon your vehicle features.
Note: Press the button to switch the door
function off when you open any door. When
the door function is off and you open a door,
the courtesy and door lamps stay off. The
indicator lamp lights amber when the door
function is off.
Note: Press the button again to switch the
door function back on. When the door
function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps turn on. The
indicator lamp lights blue when the door
function is on.

E190880

If you switch on the cargo lamps, the cargo
and trailer hitch area illuminate.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn off when you reach a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h). They also turn off after 10
minutes, fading gradually to off.

94

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
Type One

C

B

Type Two

A

C

D

A

B

E192153

E199032

A.

Door function.

A.

All lamps on.

B.
C.

All lamps on.

B.

Door function.

Map lamps.

C.

All lamps off.

D.

Map lamps.

95

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

C

D

Lighting
Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped)

Type Three

Type One

E182517

A.

Individual lamp.

B.

Individual lamp.

Type Two

A

B

C

D

E201073

A.

Map lamp.

B.

Door function.

C.

All lamps off.

D.

Map lamp.

E187343

Type Three

E187342

A.

All lamps on.

B.

Door function.
E187345

96

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lighting
Press the button to switch the lamps on
or off.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen. See your SYNC information.

CARGO LAMPS

E189587

Press the button in the lighting
control panel or in the rear cargo
box to switch on the lamps.

E190880

The cargo lamps are in the following areas:
• Either side of the cargo box.
• Next to the tailgate handle.
Note: The cargo lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also
turn off after 10 minutes, fading gradually
to off.

97

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Restoring the One-Touch Up Function

POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped)

You may lose the one-touch function if the
vehicle battery is low.

WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.

To reset the function after the battery
recharges:
1. Pull the switch all the way up.
2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
and continue to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the
window to the full down position.
One-touch up will now be functional.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.

When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.

Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING

E176215

When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.

Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
The window will stop if you release the
switch before the window closes fully.

One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped)
Press or lift the switch fully and release it.
Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.

98

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock (If Equipped)

EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.

E176216

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.

Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.

E144073

GLOBAL OPENING (If Equipped)

A

Left-hand mirror.

B

Adjustment control.

You can use the remote control to open
the windows with the ignition off.

C

Right-hand mirror.

To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on, with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running, and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.

Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.

Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.

99

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Telescoping Mirrors
This feature lets you extend the mirror
about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when
towing a trailer. You can manually pull out
or push in the mirrors to the desired
position.

E234001

PowerScope™ Power Telescoping
Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.

E234002

Power Telescoping Mirrors

Note: The left-hand and right-hand mirrors
move at different rates. For example, one
mirror may stop while the other one
continues to move. This is normal.

This feature lets you position both mirrors
at the same time.

Power-Folding Mirrors
To fold both mirrors:
1. Press the control.
2. Press control again to unfold the
mirrors.

E218902

100

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

A

Extend.

B

Retract.

Windows and Mirrors
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)

To adjust your mirrors, press the
adjustment control to position the mirrors.

While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.

Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding,
unfolding and telescoping of the mirrors
while holding the control down during full
travel, may disable the system to protect
the motors from overheating. Wait
approximately three minutes with the
vehicle running, and up to 10 minutes with
the vehicle off, for the system to reset and
for function to return to normal.

Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.

Loose Mirror

Clearance Lamps

If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.

The lower, outer part of the mirror housings
light when you switch the headlamps or
parking lamps on.

(If Equipped)

Spot Lamps (If Equipped)
The area lights are on the forward-facing
portion of the mirror housing. You can
switch them on and off by using the
controls located on the instrument panel.
See Lighting (page 89).

To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.

Trailer Towing Camera System (If

Heated Exterior Mirrors

See Blind Spot Information System
(page 252).

Equipped)

See Rear View Camera (page 236).

Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)

(If Equipped)

See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 152).

Memory Mirrors

INTERIOR MIRROR

(If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 159).

Manual Dimming Mirror
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.

101

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.

Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E176217

The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).

The control is on the overhead console.
Press and hold the control to open the
window. Pull and hold the control to close
the window.

Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.

SUN VISORS

Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.

SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped)
Power Sliding Back Window (If
Equipped)

WARNINGS
When operating the power sliding
back window, you must make sure
all rear seat occupants and cargo are
not in the proximity of the back window.

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.

Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.

102

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof

Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)

E162197

E191272

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the moonroof. They may
seriously injure themselves.

A

Moonroof open.

B

Moonroof vent.

C

Sunshade open.

D

Sunshade close.

E

Moonroof close.

Moonroof Open
Press and release to open the moonroof.

When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.

Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully
opened position to reduce wind noise or
rumbling that may happen with the
moonroof fully open. Press and release the
control again to open the moonroof fully.

The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.

Moonroof Vent
Press and release to vent the moonroof.
Sunshade Open
Press and release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens automatically with
the moonroof. You can also open the
sunshade with the moonroof closed.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the control again.

103

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Sunshade Close
Press and release to close the sunshade.
Moonroof Close
Press and release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent positions.

Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses
some distance if an obstacle is detected
while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold (E)
within two seconds after the roof comes
to a stop following a bounce-back reversal.

104

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2

E219638

A

Engine oil pressure gauge.

E

Speedometer.

B

Engine coolant temperature
gauge.

F

C

Fuel gauge.

Information display. See
General Information (page
113).

D

Transmission fluid temperature
gauge.

G

Tachometer.

105

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Type 3

E219651

A

Engine oil pressure gauge.

B

Engine coolant temperature
gauge.

C

Fuel gauge.

D

Configurable. Transmission fluid
temperature, Turbo boost or DEF
gauge (diesel engines only).

E

Speedometer.

F

Information display. See
General Information (page
113).

G

Tachometer.

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle
should stay in the normal operating range
(between L and H). If the needle falls
below the normal range, stop your vehicle,
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.

106

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge

The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.

WARNING
Do not remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the cooling system is hot.
Wait 10 minutes for the cooling
system to cool down. Cover the coolant
reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent
the possibility of scalding and slowly
remove the cap. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.

After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
•

•

Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.

•

It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.

Low Fuel Reminder

Fuel Gauge

A low fuel reminder triggers when the
distance to empty value reaches 50 mi
(80 km) to empty, with additional
warnings at 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km)
and 0 mi (0 km) to empty, provided the
message is cleared each time. An
additional warning at 75 mi (120 km) to
empty is provided when the MyKey is being
used.

Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.

Variations:
Note: The distance-to-empty warning can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending
on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.
Driving type (fuel economy
conditions)

Distance-to-empty

Fuel gauge position

Highway driving

50 mi (80 km)

1/8th tank

Severe duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)

50 mi (80 km)

1/4 tank

107

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge

Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.

Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible and verify the airflow is
not restricted such as snow or debris
blocking airflow through the grill. Also,
higher than normal operating temperature
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or
off-road use). Operating the transmission
for extended periods with the gauge in the
higher than normal area may cause
internal transmission damage. You need
to alter the severity of your driving
conditions to lower the transmission
temperature into the normal range. If the
gauge continues to show high
temperatures, see an authorized dealer.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
E144524
indicate what mode the system
is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 244).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.

Adaptive Steering (If Equipped)

Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped)

The adaptive steering system
indicator illuminates if the
E223375
system detects a fault during the
continuous diagnostic checks.

Indicates the amount of manifold air
pressure in the engine.

DEF Gauge (If Equipped)

Adaptive Steering Initialization (yellow,
flashing): The adaptive steering system
has detected a difference between
steering wheel angle and the desired road
wheel angle. The steering wheel adjusts
itself to correct this difference. This
adjustment is part of normal system
operation.

Indicates the current DEF level.

WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.

Adaptive Steering Off (yellow, solid): The
adaptive steering system is off. It is
possible that the steering wheel may not
be straight when the vehicle is driving
straight ahead. If this message persists,
see an authorized dealer.

108

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Brake System

Adaptive Steering Loss (red, solid): The
adaptive steering system integrity cannot
be verified. Do not drive the vehicle and
contact an authorized dealer immediately.
See Steering (page 259).

WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It may take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.

Anti-Lock Braking System
It illuminates momentarily when
you switch on the ignition to
confirm that the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch on the ignition or begins to flash
at anytime, have the system checked as
soon as possible.

It illuminates momentarily when
you switch on the ignition to
confirm that the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch on the ignition or begins to flash
at anytime, have the system checked as
soon as possible.

If it illuminates when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.

E144522

Illuminates when you engage the parking
brake with the ignition on.

Automatic High Beam (If Equipped)

If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.

Illuminates when this feature is
on. See Automatic High Beam
Control (page 92).

Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
It illuminates when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 252).
E151262

Check Fuel Cap (If Equipped)
Illuminates when the fuel cap
may not be properly installed.
Continued driving with this light
on may cause the Service engine soon
warning indicator to come on.

109

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Fasten Seatbelt

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E71340

Illuminates when you switch this
feature on. See Using Cruise
Control (page 243).

E71880

It illuminates and a chime
sounds to remind you to fasten
your seatbelt.

Direction Indicator

Front Airbag

Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
a burned out bulb.

If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
E67017
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.

Door Ajar

Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.

It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.

High Beam

Electronic Locking Differential (If

Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.

Equipped)

Illuminates when using the
electronic locking differential.
E163170

Hill Descent (If Equipped)

Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.

Illuminates when hill descent is
switched on.
E163171

Low Fuel Level

Engine Oil

Illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as

If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.

possible.

Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates if the tire pressure
in one or more tires is below the
correct tire pressure.

See Engine Oil Check (page 333).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.

110

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Stability Control

It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.

Illuminates when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
E138639
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 231).

Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when a powertrain
or a 4WD fault has been
detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Stability Control Off
Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It will go out when
E130458
you switch the system back on
or when you switch the ignition off.

Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.

See Using Stability Control (page 231).

Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
Illuminates when the tow/haul
feature has been activated. If the
E161509
light flashes steadily, have the
system serviced immediately, damage to
the transmission could occur.

If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.

4X2 (If Equipped)
Illuminates momentarily when
two-wheel drive high is selected.
E163173
If the light fails to display when
the ignition is turned on, or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately by
your authorized dealer.

It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 195).

4X4 LOW (If Equipped)
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged. If the light
E181780
fails to display when the ignition
is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.

111

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
4X4 HIGH (If Equipped)

During refueling, it is possible for
you to pump
water-contaminated diesel fuel
into your fuel tank. Your vehicle’s fuel
system is equipped with a fuel filter and
water separator to remove water from the
fuel. The water in fuel indicator lights when
the fuel and water separator has a
significant quantity of water in it and
requires immediate draining.

Illuminates when four-wheel
drive high is engaged. If the light
E181779
fails to display when the ignition
is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.

Diesel Engine Brake (If Equipped)

E171217

If the water in fuel indicator illuminates
when the engine is running, stop your
vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off
the engine, then drain the fuel and water
separator. See Fuel Quality (page 187).
Allowing water to stay in the fuel system,
after the water in fuel indicator illuminates,
could result in extensive damage or failure
of the fuel injection system.

Illuminates when you switch the
manual engine brake on. See
General Information (page

225).

E234452

Illuminates when you switch the
automatic engine brake on. See
General Information (page

225).

Note: Do not drain the fuel and water
separator while the engine is running. Air will
enter into the fuel system causing the engine
not to operate properly.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (If Equipped)
With the key in the on position,
illuminates when the DEF is
E163176
contaminated, low or someone
has tampered with the DEF system. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 198).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Headlamps On Warning Chime

Wait To Start (If Equipped)

Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.

Illuminates when you switch the
ignition on as part of the
pre-start system. Wait until the
wait to start indicator turns off before
attempting to start vehicle. See Starting
a Diesel Engine (page 178).

Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.

Water In Fuel (If Equipped)

Parking Brake On Warning Chime

WARNING

Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.

Do not drain the water-in-fuel
separator while the engine is running.
Failure to follow this warning may
result in fire, serious injury, death or
property damage.

112

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 1 and 2) (If Equipped)

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Trailer options are not available if
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).

•

Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.

•

E219650

This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
E204495
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.

•
•

113

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.

Information Displays
Type 1
Main Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings

Trip 1
Digital Speed
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
DTE
Average Fuel
Outside Temp
•
•
•
•
•
•

Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual trips.
Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual trips.
DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Outside Air - Shows the outside air temperature.

Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Note: Trip 2 information is the same as Trip 1.

114

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays

Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
•
•
•
•

Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time.
Average Speed - Shows the average speed the vehicle has driven.

Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.

Driver Assist
DEF Gauge
DEF Status
Exhaust Filter
Engine Hours

Engine Hours
Engine Idle

Dual Fuel
Tank

Front Tank
Rear Tank

Hill Strt Asst.
Oil Temp

Oil Temp

Tire Pressure
Trans. Temp.
Rear Park Aid
Tr Brake Type

Select Your Setting

Tr Brake Effort
Trailer Sway

115

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays

Settings
Vehicle

A. Engine Off
Auto Regen
DTE Calculate Select Your Setting
Lighting

Autolamp Delay

Select Your Setting

Daytime Light
Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Remote Unlock

Select Your Setting

Oil Life Reset

Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your
settings

Alarm

Select Your Setting
Ask on Exit

Remote Start Climate Control

Select Your Setting

Seats
Duration
System

MyKey

Windows

Remote Open

Wiper
Controls

Courtesy Wipe

MyKey Status Shows information related to the configured MyKey(s).
Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your
settings.
911 Assist

Select Your Setting

Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder

116

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Vol. Limiter
Clear MyKeys
Display Setup Units

Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your
settings.
Select Your Setting

Temperature
Language
Tire Pressure
Type 2
Main Menu
Display Mode
Trip/Fuel
Towing
Off Road
Settings

Display Mode
DTE
Dual Fuel Tanks
DEF Gauge
DEF Status
Exhaust Filter Status
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer

117

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Display Mode
Engine Information
Transmission Temp.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
Dual Fuel Tanks - Shows the distance to empty for the front and rear tanks.
DEF Gauge - Shows DEF gauge graphic.
DEF Status - Shows DEF status on demand screen.
Exhaust Filter - Shows exhaust filter on demand screen.
Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in psi.
Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature value.

Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Compass

Select Your Setting

Average Speed
Trip 1 or 2
• Shows the time, mileage and average fuel economy of an individual journey. Also
shows DTE.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph, average mpg
and DTE.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Also shows
DTE.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.

118

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Towing
Provides trailer status information for the
active trailer: Trailer Blind Spot status,
Trailer Reverse Guidance status, trailer
name, accumulated trailer miles, trailer
brake gain and output.

Trailer Status Trailer Status

Trailer Light Check

Provides status of the brake, park and
direction indicator light for the active
trailer.

Trailer Tire
Pressure

Displays the trailer tire pressure and options to customize the display.

Trailer
Options

Trailer Sway Control
Select Trailer
Change Trailer Settings

Rename Trailer
Reset Trailer
Distance

Follow onscreen
directions to
confirm or modify
your settings.

Change Blind Spot
Measure
Add Trailer Blind
Spot
Change Trailer
Sticker
Add Trailer Rev.
Guidance
Change Brake Type

Select Your Setting

Change Brake Effort
Delete Trailer
Change Trailer
Setup
Add Trailer

Select Your Setting

Add Trailer
Trailer Brake Type
Trailer Brake Effort

119

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Select Your Setting

Information Displays
Towing
Change Trailer
Setup
Trailer Rev. Guidance
Connection Checklist

Follow onscreen
directions to
confirm or modify
your settings.

Conventional
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck

Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle and roll.

Settings
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
DTE Calculation

Select Your Setting

Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Advanced
Settings

Vehicle

Auto Engine Off
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting

Autolamp
Delay

Select Your Setting

Daytime Lights
Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Remote
Unlock

120

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Select Your Setting

Information Displays
Settings
Remote Start Climate
Control
Seats
Duration
System
Oil Life Reset

Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.

Alarm

Select Your Setting
Ask on Exit

Windows

Remote Open
Remote Close

Wiper
Controls
MyKey

Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing

MyKey Status
Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
911 Assist

Select Your Setting

Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Display
Setup

Units

Select Your Setting

Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language

121

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 3) (If Equipped)

•

•
•
•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.

E219639

Type 3
Main Menu
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Off Road
Settings

122

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays

MyView
Trip 1
Fuel Economy
Tire Pressure
Off Road Status
Configure MyView

Add/Remove
Screens

Trip/Fuel Screens

Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
Navigation/Compass

Truck Info Screens Turbo Boost
Transmission Temp
Trans. Temp. Gauge
Diesel Particulate Filter
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
MyKey Status
Towing Screens

Towing Status
Towing Information
Trailer Light Check

Off Road Screens

123

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Off Road Status

Information Displays
MyView
Reorder Screens

Screen Selection 1
-7

Up/Down moves selection in the list

Press OK to select
•
•
•
•

Trip 1/2 - Shows your trip timer, fuel used, trip odometer and average mpg.
Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage and average mpg.
Tire Pressure - Shows your car outline with tire pressure values.
Off Road Status - Shows your pitch and roll screen.

Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Navigation/Compass
Compass

Select Your Setting

Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Odo - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Navigation/Compass
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).

124

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays

Truck Info
Turbo Boost Gauge
Gauge View

Transmission Temperature Gauge
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge

Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status
Diesel Particulate Filter Status
Dual Fuel Tanks
Engine Information
Transmission Temperature
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Turbo Boost Gauge - Shows the turbo boost gauge.
Transmission Temperature Gauge - Shows the transmission temperature gauge.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge - Shows diesel exhaust fluid gauge.
Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in psi.
Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status - Shows the diesel exhaust fluid status.
Diesel Particulate Filter Status - Shows the diesel particulate filter status.
Dual Fuel Tanks - Shows the front and rear fuel tank gauges.
Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature value.

Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.

125

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Towing
Towing
Status

% Grade, steering angle, gain and output display

Towing
Information

Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Trailer Reverse Guidance Status, Trailer
BLIS Status and Trailer Disconnected

Trailer
Light
Check

Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active
trailer.

Trailer Tire
Pressure

Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings.

Trailer
Setup

Trailer Sway Control
Select trailer

Select Your Trailer

Change Trailer Settings

Rename Trailer
Reset Trailer
Distance

Follow onscreen
directions to
confirm or modify
your settings.

Change Blind Spot
Measurement
Add Blind Spot
Change Reverse
Guidance Sticker
Add Trailer Reverse
Guidance™
Change Brake Type
Change Brake Effort
Delete Trailer
Change Trailer
Setup
Add Trailer

Trailer Brake Type

Select Your Setting

Trailer Brake Effort
Trailer Setup

126

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Follow onscreen
directions to
confirm or modify
your settings.

Information Displays
Towing
ConnecConventional
tion CheckFifth Wheel
list

Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.

Gooseneck

Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4.

Settings
Auto Highbeam
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Pre-Collision Alert Sensitivity

Select Your Setting

Pre-Collision
- On
Cruise
Control

Select Your Setting

DTE Calculation
Gauge Selection
Lane
Keeping
System

Mode

Select Your Setting

Sensitivity
Alert Intensity

127

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Advanced
Settings

Vehicle

Auto Engine Off
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting

Autolamp Delay

Select Your
Setting

Daytime Lights
Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Remote Unlock

Select Your
Setting

Oil Life Reset

Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.

Alarm

Select Your Setting
Ask on Exit

Power Running
Boards

Select Your Setting

Remote Start

Climate Control
Front Seats & Wheel

Select Your
Setting

Duration
System
Windows

Remote Open

Wiper Controls

Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing

MyKey

MyKey Status

Shows information related to the
configured MyKey(s)

Create MyKey

Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.

911 Assist

Select Your Setting

Do Not Disturb
AdvanceTrac

128

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys

Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.

Display Setup Units

Select Your Setting

Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language

INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.

E184451

Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.

Active Park
Message

Action

Active Park Fault

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.

129

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message

Action

Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Cruise Control (page 243).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available

A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Cruise Control (page 243).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Cruise Control (page 243).

Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off

The system has disabled the automatic braking.

Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control

The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.

Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate

Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.

Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down

The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.

Adaptive Steering
Message

Action

Adaptive Steering Initialization

The adaptive steering system has detected a difference
between steering wheel angle and the desired road wheel
angle. The steering wheel adjusts itself to correct this difference. This adjustment is part of normal system operation.

Adaptive Steering Fault
The adaptive steering system is off. It is possible that the
Service Required
steering wheel may not be straight when the vehicle is driving
straight ahead. If this message persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Adaptive Steering Loss
Do Not Drive

The adaptive steering system integrity cannot be verified. Do
not drive the vehicle and contact an authorized dealer
immediately.

130

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
Message

Action

Service AdvanceTrac

The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

AdvanceTrac Off

The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.

AdvanceTrac On

The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.

AdvanceTrac SPORT
MODE

The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
it on.

Traction Control Off

The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 229).

Traction Control On

The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 229).

Airbag
Message

Action

Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat

Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.

Alarm and Security
Message

Action

Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.

Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 78).

131

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message

Action

Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds

The engine is getting ready to shut off.

Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy

The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.

Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override

The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.

Battery and Charging System
Message

Action

Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off

The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.

Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
Battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.

132

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message

Action

Blindspot System Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual

The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252).

Vehicle Coming From X

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 252).

Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 252).

Cross Traffic System
Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Cross Traffic Alert Deac- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
tivated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 252).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
ated Trailer Attached
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 252).
Trailer Blind Spot Not
available Due to Invalid
Trailer

Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or gooseneck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or
longer than 33 ft (10 m).

133

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Collision Warning System
Message

Action

Collision Warning
Malfunction

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Driving Aids (page 250).

Collision Warning Not
Available

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Diesel Messages
WARNING
When the Exhaust Filter Cleaning
message appears in the information
display, do not park near flammable
materials, vapors or structures until filter
cleaning is complete.
Message

Action

Exhaust Filter Cleaning

Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine
actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel
Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust
soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust
temperature will return to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL.

Exhaust Filter Overloaded Drive to Clean

The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off.

Exhaust Filter Overloaded Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Drive to Clean Now

The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off.

134

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Exhaust System Overheated Stop Safely
NOW

Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeded the
intended operating range. If this warning occurs, a tone
sounds, followed by reduced engine power. The engine shuts
down when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h) . Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.

Engine Warming Please In extremely cold weather, typically below -15°F (-26°C) and
Wait {seconds:00} sec if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will not
respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds. This
restriction allows your engine to circulate the oil properly in
order to avoid engine damage.
Exhaust Filter Drive
Complete

Your diesel particulate filter is clean.

Exhaust Filter Cleaned

Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only).

Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Stopped

The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only).

DEF Level Range: XX mi/
km Refill Now

The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining
diesel exhaust fluid.

DEF Level Empty Speed Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top
Limited to XX MPH / km/ speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must
h in XX mi/km
replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 198).
DEF Level Empty Speed Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed
will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel
Limited to XX MPH/km/
h Upon Restart
exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198).
DEF Level Empty Speed
The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the
Limited to XX MPH/km/
diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
h
vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page
198).
DEF Level Empty Engine The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust
Idled Soon
fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic
Reductant System (page 198).

135

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

DEF Level Empty Engine A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system.
Idled See Manual
The vehicle will enter into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust
fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to
resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective
Catalytic Reductant System (page 198).
DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
to XX MPH/km/h in XX
vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed
mi/km
distance and count down from this point. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
to XX MPH/km/h Upon vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Have
Restart
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
to XX MPH/km/h
vehicle’s top speed is limited. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Exhaust Filter Over Limit You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Service Now
Ignoring the Exhaust Filter Over Limit Service Now warning
message could lead to reduced drivability and customer
expense, including damage to the diesel particulate filter.
Your new vehicle warranty may not cover this damage.
Water in Fuel Drain Filter

The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity
and needs draining. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 351).

Fuel Pressure Low

A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low
fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. See Fuel Quality
(page 187).

Doors and Locks
Message

Action

X Door Ajar

The door(s) listed is not completely closed.

136

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Driver Alert
Message

Action

Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.

Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested

Take a rest soon.

Drivetrain
Message

Action

To Engage Locking
Differential Slow to XX
mph/km/h

The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.

To Engage Locking
Differential Release
Accelerator Pedal

The electronic locking differential requests the accelerator
to be released in order to engage.

Check Locking Differential

An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is
present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral

The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground.

Neutral Tow Disabled

The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.

Engine
Message

Action

Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp

The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.

137

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Fuel
Message

Action

Fuel Level Low

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.

Keys and Intelligent Access
Message

Action

To START Press Brake

A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.

No Key Detected

The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 176).

Restart Now or Key is
Needed

You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.

Full Accessory Power
Active

Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.

Starting System Fault

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.

Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Failure

You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.

Max Number of Keys
Learned

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.

Not Enough Keys
Learned

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.

Engine ON

Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.

138

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
Message

Action

Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

Front Camera Temporarily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.

Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen

The system has detected a condition that requires you to
clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.

Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
tion Service Required
as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
Wheel
wheel.

Maintenance
Message

Action

Low Engine Oil Pressure

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Change Engine Oil Soon

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Changing
the Engine Oil and Oil Filter (page 335).

Oil Change Required

The oil life left is at 0%. See Changing the Engine Oil and
Oil Filter (page 335).

Brake Fluid Level Low

The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 349).

Check Brake System

The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Transport / Factory
Mode Contact Dealer

Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. See an authorized dealer.

See Manual

The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.

139

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
MyKey
Message

Action

MyKey not Created

You did not program a MyKey.

MyKey Active Drive
Safely

MyKey is active.

Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h

When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.

Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting

You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.

Check Speed Drive
Safely

You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.

Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio

Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.

AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.

Traction Control On MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.

MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated

With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.

Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.

Off Road
Message

Action

Hill Descent Control Active

Hill descent control mode is active.

Hill Descent Control OFF

Hill descent control mode is inactive.

For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less

Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
entry has not been met.

For Hill Descent Select Gear

You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.

140

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control

Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
resume control.

Hill Descent Control Fault

A hill descent system fault is present.

Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling

The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.

Hill Descent Control Ready

The hill descent control system is ready.

Park Aid
Message

Action

Check Front Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
235).

Check Rear Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
235).

Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

Rear Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

Park Brake
Message

Action

To Release: Press Brake
and Switch

The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.

Park Brake Use Switch
to Release

The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.

Release Park Brake

The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.

Park Brake Not Applied

The electric park brake is not fully applied.

Park Brake Not Released

The electric park brake is not fully released.

141

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special
Mode
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required

The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Power Steering
Message

Action

Steering Fault Service
Now

The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.

Steering Loss Stop
Safely

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist Fault
Service Required

The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now

The steering lock system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.

Remote Start
Message

Action

To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button

A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.

Seats
Message

Action

Memory Recall Not
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.
Permitted While Driving
Memory {0} Saved

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.

142

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Starting System
Message

Action

To START Press Brake

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .

Cranking Time Exceeded

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.

Engine Start Pending
Please Wait

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.

Pending Start Cancelled

The system has cancelled the pending start.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message

Action

Tire Pressure Low

One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400).

Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 400).

Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Trailer
Message

Action

Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0}

The current gain setting for the trailer brake.

Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0} No Trailer

The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
trailer is not connected.

Trailer Brake Module Fault

Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 272).

Trailer Connected

A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.

143

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Trailer Disconnected

A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.

Trailer Sway Reduce Speed

The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.

Trailer Wiring Fault

There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 272).

Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps

There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.

Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps

There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.

Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual

There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 272).

Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual

There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 272).

Trailer Tire Low Specified:

One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified
tire pressure.

Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault

A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault

The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer.

Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected

The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system.

Trailer Tire Pressure Indication
Not Setup See Manual

The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
See General Information (page 113).

144

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Information Displays
4WD
Message

Action

Check 4x4

A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

4x4 Shift in Progress

The 4X4 system is making a shift.

For 4x4 LOW Shift to N

When your vehicle is at a stop and you need to shift
into Neutral before you select 4X4 LOW.

For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH

When your vehicle is moving and you need to reduce
your speed to select 4X4 LOW.

To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N

You select 2WD while your vehicle is at a stop in 4X4
LOW and you need to shift into Neutral.

To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH You select 2WD while your vehicle is operating in 4X4
LOW and you need to reduce your speed.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward

May display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.

4x4 Temporarily Disabled

The 4X4 system is temporarily disabled, and the overall
powertrain output response is reduced. The 4X4
system and powertrain response will be automatically
restored after the 4X4 system has had the opportunity
to cool down.

4x4 Restored

The 4X4 system has been restored to its original
setting.

4x4 Temporarily Locked

The 4X4 system is temporarily locked for added driveline protection and has automatically switched to 4H
setting.

145

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)

E217902

A

Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

B

Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.

C

Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.

D

Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.

Note: At least one of these
buttons remain on while the
system is on.

146

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Climate Control
E

Temperature control: Adjusts
the temperature of the air
circulated in your vehicle.

F

MAX Defrost: Turn to the right
to switch on defrost. Air flows
through the windshield vents
and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.

H

Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.

Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.
G

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

I

Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 162).

J

Heated exterior mirrors: Press
to switch the heated exterior
mirrors on and off.

MAX A/C: Turn to the left for
maximum cooling. Recirculated
air flows through the instrument
panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to
the highest speed.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)

147

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Climate Control

E217905

A

B

Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.

AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust
to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature. You can also
switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.
MAX Defrost: Press to switch
on defrost. The driver and
passenger settings set to HI, air
flows through the windshield
vents, and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.

148

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

C

Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.

D

Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.

E

Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.

Climate Control
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.
F

G

H

I

MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. The driver and
passenger settings set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning turns on and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed.
DUAL: Press to switch on
temperature control for the
passenger side of the vehicle.
When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the
same as the driver settings.

Climate controlled seats:
Press to switch the climate
controlled seats on and off. See
Climate Controlled Seats
(page 163).

L

Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

M

Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated Rear
Window (page 152).

N

Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE

Passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting on the
passenger side.

General Hints

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.

Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.

Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.

Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.
J

K

Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.

Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 162).

Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
149

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Climate Control
Manual Climate Control

Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.

Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.

Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.

Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.

Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

1

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Press AUTO.

2

Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

3

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

Recommended Settings for Heating
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

1

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

2

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

3

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

150

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Climate Control
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

1

Select MAX A/C.

Select MAX A/C.

2

Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.

Recommended Settings for Cooling
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

1

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

2

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

3

Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.

Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

1

Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
distribution buttons.

2

Press A/C.

3

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

4

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

151

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Climate Control
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.

HEATED REAR WINDOW (If
Equipped)

Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
E184884
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.

Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).

Note: Make sure the engine is on before
operating the heated windows.

For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.

Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle Warranty may not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

REMOTE START (If Equipped)
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display.

HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS

The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.

When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.

You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.

You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.

CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.

Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display).

You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.

152

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Climate Control
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
turn on.
In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display). The heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.

153

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.

SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.

Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.

The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. An improperly
adjusted head restraint may not
adequately protect an occupant during an
impact from the rear.
154

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
The head restraints may consist of:

WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.

A

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

B

Two steel stems.

C

Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.

D

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

E

Fold button.

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Front Seat Head Restraint

Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold buttons C and D.
2. Pull the head restraint up.

E138642

Installing the Head Restraint

Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.

A

Folding the Head Restraint

B

Note: The rear seat outboard head
restraints may fold forward for improved
visibility.

E
C

1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
E166700

D

Front Row Center and Rear Seat Center
(Crew Cab) Head Restraints
Note: The SuperCab has rear outboard
head restraints that are not removable and
are bolted to the back wall.

155

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
Your vehicle may be equipped with head
restraints that are non-adjustable. The
non-adjustable head restraints consist of:

A

B

C

E162872

E144727

A

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

B

Two steel stems.

C

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

1.

Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.

Removing the Head Restraint

Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.

1. Press and hold buttons C.
2. Pull up the head restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.

MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING

Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)

Do not adjust the driver's seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.

The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:

156

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward

Manual Lumbar

(If Equipped)

E166702
E175314

The lumbar support control is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.

Recline Adjustment

POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or seat
backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.

E175315

157

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats

E176038

Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.

Power Lumbar (If Equipped)

Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. When the seatback and cushion
are both active, the massage will alternate
between zones

E176039

Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system turns off after
20 minutes.

E156301

158

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats

Massage mode

Lumbar and bolster mode

A

Back massage intensity
adjustment

Upper lumbar

B

Massage intensity decrease

Lumbar decrease

*

and off
C

Cushion massage intensity
adjustment

Lower lumbar

D

Massage intensity increase

Lumbar increase

E

On and off

-

**

*

The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature defaults to the middle
lumbar mode.

MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the memory seat,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.

**

Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function. To access and make
adjustments to the lumbar setting:

Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:

1.

Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.

•
•
•

Driver seat.
Power mirrors.
Optional adjustable pedals.

The memory control is on the driver door.

To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1.

Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Low or High.

159

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror (or any memory
button) during a memory recall cancels the
operation.

Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1.

With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the positions you desire.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.

E142554

Saving a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the features to the positions you
desire.
3. Press and hold the preset button until
you hear a single tone.
Note: You can save up to three preset
memory positions.

To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.

Note: You can save a memory preset at any
time.

Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.

Recalling a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The seat and mirrors move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall preset memory
positions when you switch the ignition off,
or when the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If
Equipped)

If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you
put the transmission in park (P) and
remove the key from the ignition.

Note: You can also recall a preset memory
position by pressing the unlock button on
your remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.

The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you put the key in the
ignition.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 113).

Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the easy entry position.

160

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position

REAR SEATS (If Equipped)
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion

WARNING

The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion.
You can flip each seat cushion up into a
vertical storage position.

Check under the seat cushion to
make sure no cargo or objects are
under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.

E181250

Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks
into the vertical storage position.
Cushion Lock (If Equipped)
The locking key is in the keyfob. See
Remote Control (page 56).

E166704

Pull the control on the bottom of the seat
cushion to release it from the storage
position.

Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped)
The rear seat has storage space under the
seat cushion.

E224956

Turn the key to lock or unlock.

161

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
Use your vehicle key to lock the storage
space.

HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING

E162739

People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

A

Lift the lever and flip up the seat cushion
to access the storage space and the power
point (A).

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

E162740

To remove the storage space divider,
squeeze the sides and lift it from the
storage tub.

Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

E162741

162

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.

Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
E146322

WARNING

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
the on position, press the heated seat
switch to enable heating mode. When
activated, they turn off automatically when
you switch off the engine.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)

Heated Seats
WARNING

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that may block the
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles or
other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.

Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
The rear seat heat controls are on the rear
of the center console.

163

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
Note: The cooled seats may remain on after
you remote start your vehicle, based on your
remote start settings. The heated seats may
also turn on when you start your vehicle if
they were on when you switched your
vehicle off.

Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.

Note: After 60 minutes of operation, the
cooled seats switch off. Press the cooled
seat symbol to switch the cooled seats on.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
E146322

Your vehicle has lifetime air filters that are
integrated with the seats. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not
required.

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If

Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.

Equipped)

Note: After 60 minutes of operation, the
heated seats switch off. Press the heated
seat symbol to switch the heated seats on.

Cooled Seats
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.

E223578

1.

Press the control to release the cushion
latch.
2. Lift the cushion to gain access to the
storage compartment.

E146309

164

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Seats
The cupholder is located inside the storage
compartment. You can also flip the
cupholder so that it faces forward. See
Center Console (page 172).

Pull the strap located on the center
seatback to access the armrest and
cupholders.
The cupholders are located inside the rear
seat armrest.

Cushion Lock

To open the cupholders:

The locking key is in the keyfob. Remove
the cover of the keyfob to access the
locking key. See Remote Control (page
56).

1.

Push in gently on the center of the
plastic panel at the front edge of the
armrest. The cupholders will partially
open.
2. Pull the cupholder fully open before
using.

E224738

Turn the key to lock or unlock.

REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)

E181222

165

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.

E188211

The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.

Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.

Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.

In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.

Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.

Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.

166

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

E188212

1.

With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.

Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

1.

Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.

167

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)

E188212

E188213

3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.

1.

Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.

Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming

Reprogramming a Single Button

Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.

To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1.

Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.

Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.

For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

1.

Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.

168

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

169

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point

Locations
Note: Timed power points remain on for 30
minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.
If you switch the vehicle off, the timed
power points remain on for 75 minutes.

WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.

Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the seat bin.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 20 amps.

110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC
Power Outlet

Note: Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points, this may result in damage to
vehicle systems.

WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 400 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.

Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 240 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.

Note: This feature works only when the
engine is running.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.

Note: This feature has a maximum output
of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).

To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.

Note: While in drive (D), the maximum
outlet output is 300 watts.
Note: When powering electric devices that
require more than 10 watts in vehicles
equipped with keyless start, the engine must
remain running. If the engine is turned off or
you switch the ignition to accessory mode,
plugged in devices will not be charged.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 400 watts. It is
on the instrument panel and rear of the
center console.

170

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.

E191617

When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
You can use the 400 watt power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
• Electric hand drills.
• Rechargeable power tools.
• Video games.
• Laptops.
• Televisions.
Note: Max 400W - when the vehicle is
parked and 300W - when the vehicle is
driving.

171

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Storage Compartments
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)

Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:

E224959

Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.

UNDER SEAT STORAGE
Rear Under Seat Storage
E250516

A

Storage compartment.

B

Front storage compartment with
USB ports.

C

Sliding cup holder.

D

Center storage compartment
with auxiliary power point.

E

Rear cup holders.

F

AC power point.

G

Heated rear seats.

H

Auxiliary power point.

I

USB charging ports.

E229819

1.

172

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Lift rear seat to access under seat
storage bin.

Storage Compartments

E235007

E235008

2. Lift front and side panels to expand
and lock them in place.

3. Lock the panels in an open position.

E235009

173

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Storage Compartments
4. To collapse, lift lever and fold in the
side and front panels.
Note: Make sure the storage divider is not
locked into place when collapsing.

174

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow
storm or blowing snow conditions, the
engine air induction may become partially
clogged with snow and ice. If this occurs,
the engine may experience a significant
reduction in power output. At the earliest
opportunity, clear all the snow and ice
away from the air induction inlet.

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.

IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)

Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5.0 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.

A (off) - The ignition is off.

The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.

B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.

E252522

Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.

Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.

When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.

C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.

175

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
•

D (start) - Cranks the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The system may not function if the
intelligent access key is close to metal
objects or electronic devices, for example
keys or a cell phone.

STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE - 6.2L/6.8L

Note: A valid intelligent access key must
be located inside your vehicle to switch the
ignition on and start your vehicle.

When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine.

Ignition Modes

If the engine idle speed does not slow
down automatically, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
• Turn the ignition key to the on position.

E144447

The keyless starting system has three
modes:

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Off: Turns the ignition off.
•

1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start your vehicle.
3. When the engine starts, release the key
and then gradually release the brake
pedal as the engine speed increases.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when your vehicle is running but is not
moving.

On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•

Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when the ignition is on and when your
vehicle starts.

Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

Start: Starts your vehicle. The engine may
not start when your vehicle starts.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1.

176

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fully depress the brake pedal.

Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Turn the key to position D to start the
engine.
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving

Do not crank the engine for more than 10
seconds as starter damage may occur. If
the engine does not start, switch the
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before
trying again.

Switching off the engine when your
vehicle is still moving results in a
significant decrease in braking
assistance. Higher effort is required to
apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle.
A significant decrease in steering
assistance could also occur. The steering
does not lock, but higher effort could be
required to steer your vehicle. When you
switch the ignition off, some electrical
circuits, for example airbags, also turn off.
If you unintentionally switch the ignition
off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the
engine.

WARNING

Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: If the push button ignition switch is
pressed again prior to the engine starting
the ignition will switch to accessory mode
and will not start.
Note: If the brake pedal is released before
the engine has started, follow the engine
start sequence again.

1.

1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the center of the push button
ignition switch.
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.

Put the transmission into neutral (N)
and use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.

Failure to Start

Automatic Engine Shutdown

If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:

If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period of time. The ignition
also turns off in order to save battery
power. Before the engine shuts down, a
message appears in the information
display showing a timer counting down
from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene
within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down.
Another message appears in the
information display to inform you that the
engine has shut down in order to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as you normally do.

1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1.

When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
2. Apply the parking brake.

177

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible
Fuel Vehicles Only)

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING

The starting characteristics of all grades
of E85 ethanol make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below
0°F (-18°C). Consult your fuel distributor
for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should
supply winter grade ethanol, the same as
with unleaded gasoline.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

Important Ventilating Information

If summer grade ethanol is used in cold
weather conditions, 0°F (-18°C), you may
experience increased cranking times, rough
idle or hesitation until the engine has
warmed up.

If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:

You may experience a decrease in
performance when the engine is cold when
operating on E85 ethanol.

•
•

Do not use starting fluid such as ether in
the air intake system. Such fluid could
cause immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury.

Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5
centimeters).
Set your climate control to outside air.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE 6.7L DIESEL

If you should experience cold weather
starting problems on E85 ethanol, and
neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol
nor an engine block heater is available, the
addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank
improves cold starting performance. Your
vehicle is designed to operate on E85
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or
any mixture of the two.

Read all starting instructions carefully
before you start your vehicle.
For temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
use of the correct grade engine oil is
essential for proper operation. Refer to
engine oil specifications for more
information. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432).
Your vehicle may have a cold weather
starting strategy that prevents severe
engine damage by assisting in engine
lubrication warm-up. In extremely cold
ambient temperatures, this strategy
activates and prevents the accelerator
pedal from being used for 30 seconds after
you start your vehicle. A message appears
in the information display as your vehicle
warms up. By not allowing the accelerator
pedal to be used, the engine oil is allowed
to properly lubricate the bearings

If the Engine Fails to Start Using the
Preceding Instructions (Flexible Fuel
Vehicles Only)
1.

Press the accelerator pedal down
one-third to one-half of its travel, and
then crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the
key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speed
increases. If the engine still does not
start, repeat Step 1.

178

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Vehicles with Keyless Start

preventing engine damage due to lack of
proper lubrication. After the 30 second
warm-up period, the accelerator pedal will
be operational again and a message
appears informing you the vehicle is ok to
drive.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: If the push button ignition switch is
pressed again prior to the engine starting
the ignition will switch to accessory mode
and will not start.

When you start the engine in extremely
cold temperatures -15°F (-26°C), we
recommend that you allow the engine to
idle for several minutes before you drive
the vehicle.

Note: If the brake pedal is released before
the engine has started, follow the engine
start sequence again.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the center of the push button
ignition switch.
Note: A message will appear Engine Start
Pending, Please Wait.

Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).

3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.

Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
System

Note: Do not press the accelerator during
starting.

The diesel engine glow system consists of:
•
•
•
•
•

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to position C
Note: A message will appear Engine Start
Pending, Please Wait.

Eight glow plugs (one per cylinder)
Glow Plug Control Module
Engine Coolant Temperature sensor
Barometric pressure sensor
Environmental temperature sensor

The powertrain and glow plug control
modules electronically control the glow
plug system. After you switch the ignition
on, the glow plug control module
immediately energizes the glow plugs. The
glow plug control module uses the engine
coolant temperature, barometric pressure
sensor and environmental temperature
sensor to determine how long the glow
plugs stay energized. The required time for
the glow plugs to be energized decreases
as the coolant temperature, barometric
pressure and environmental temperature
increase.

3. Wait until the engine glow-plug
indicator turns off.
4. Turn the key to position D to start the
engine.
5. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10
seconds as starter damage may occur. If
the engine does not start, switch the
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before
trying again.

179

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown

When the glow plug pre-heat indicator
turns off, turn the key to start. After you
start the engine, the glow plugs may
remain on for a period. If you do not start
the engine before the glow plug activation
time ends, you will need to reset the glow
plugs by switching the ignition off. After
the engine starts, allow it to idle for about
15 seconds. This protects the engine. Do
not increase engine speed until the oil
pressure gauge indicates normal pressure.

If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.

Cold Weather Operation
Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
the engine to its normal operating
temperature. Long periods of idling,
especially in cold weather, can cause a
buildup of deposits which can cause engine
damage.

Cold Weather Starting
WARNINGS
Do not use starting fluid, for example
ether, in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate
explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.

Change to a lighter grade engine oil to
make starting easier under these
conditions. Refer to engine oil
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432).

Do not add gasoline, gasohol, alcohol
or kerosene to diesel fuel. This
creates a serious fire hazard and
causes engine performance problems.

Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
temperatures. Diesel fuel which has not
been properly formulated for the ambient
conditions may gel which can clog the fuel
filters. One indication that the fuel filter(s)
may be clogged is if the engine starts, stalls
after a short time, and then does not
restart. If you have been using biodiesel,
you may need to use a fuel with lower
biodiesel content, try another brand, or
discontinue using biodiesel. Do not use
alcohol based additives to correct fuel
gelling. This may result in damage to the
fuel injectors and system. Use the proper
anti-gel and performance improvement
product. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432).

We recommend that the engine block
heater be used for starting when the
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See
Engine Block Heater (page 183).
When operating in cold weather, you may
use Motorcraft® cetane improvers or
non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from
a reputable manufacturer as needed.
Switch the ignition on. Do not
start the engine until the
glow-plug indicator turns off.

180

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Your vehicle has a fuel and water separator
that recirculates fuel from the engine to
help prevent fuel filter clogging. To avoid
engine fuel starvation during cold weather
operation of 32°F (0°C) or below, we
recommend that the fuel level in your tank
should not drop below ¼ full. This helps
prevent air from entering the fuel system
and stalling the engine.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
In order to operate the engine in
temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower, read
the following instructions:
• Make sure that the batteries are of
sufficient size and are fully charged.
Check other electrical components to
make sure they are in optimum
condition.
• Use the proper coolant solution at the
concentration recommended
protecting the engine against damage
from freezing.
• Try to keep the fuel tank full as much
as possible at the end of operation to
prevent condensation in the fuel
system.
• Make sure you use proper cold weather
engine oil and that it is at its proper
level. Also, if necessary, make sure to
follow the engine oil and filter change
schedule found under the Special
operating conditions section listed in
the scheduled maintenance
information.
• At temperatures of -9°F (-23°C) or
below, it is recommended that you use
an engine block heater to improve cold
engine starting.
• If operating in arctic temperatures of
-20°F (-29°C) or lower, consult your
truck dealer for information about
special cold weather equipment and
precautions.

Your vehicle has a selective catalytic
reduction system that uses Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) to operate properly. You need
to replenish your vehicle’s DEF at certain
intervals. When filling your vehicle’s DEF
tank in cold weather, take special care to
prevent damage to the tank. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 198).
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle
speed if you leave it idling in park (P). As
the engine warms-up, the engine sound
level decreases due to the activation of
PCM-controlled sound reduction features.
If you operate your vehicle in a heavy
snowstorm or blowing snow conditions,
snow and ice can clog the engine air
induction. If this occurs, the engine may
experience a significant reduction in power
output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and ice away from inside the
air filter assembly. Remove the air cleaner
cover and the air filter and remove any
snow or ice. Remove any debris, snow or
ice, on the foam filter by brushing the
surface with a soft brush. Once you have
cleared all of the debris, reinstall the air
filter and cover.
Do not use water, solvents, or a hard brush
for cleaning the foam filter.

181

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Idle Control

We recommend the following cold
weather idling guidelines:
• You can use Motorcraft® cetane
improvers or non-alcohol-based
cetane improvers from a reputable
manufacturer as needed.
• Maintain the engine cooling system
properly.
• Avoid shutting the engine down after
an extensive idling period. Drive your
vehicle for several miles with the
engine at normal operating
temperatures under a moderate load.
• Consider using an engine block heater.
• For extended idle times use an
approved idle speed increase device.

Your vehicle may have a factory option for
a stationary elevated idle control through
the upfitter switches in the overhead
console. This allows the operator to
elevate the idle RPM for extended idle
periods, as well as aftermarket equipment
such as PTO operation. You must configure
this feature even if ordered from the
factory. See your authorized dealer for
required upfitting.
Operation in Snow and Rain
Vehicle operation in heavy snowfall or
extreme rain conditions may feed
excessive amounts of snow or water into
the air intake system. This could plug the
air filter with snow and may cause the
engine to lose power and possibly shut
down.

Winter Operating Tips for Arctic
Operation -20°F (-29°C) and Below
The following information is a guideline
only and is not to be the only source of
possible solutions in resolving extreme
cold temperature issues.

We recommend the following actions after
operating your vehicle up to 200 mi
(320 km) in snowfall or extreme rain:
•

Starting Aids
WARNING
Do not use starting fluid, for example
ether, in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate
explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.

Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear all the snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet (do not
remove the foam filter) and reset the
air filter restriction gauge.

Note: Removal of the foam filter degrades
your vehicle performance during snow and
hot weather conditions.
•

The use of the factory engine block heater
assists in engine starting in extreme cold
ambient temperatures See Engine Block
Heater (page 183).

Extreme rain: The air filter dries after
about 15–30 minutes at highway
speeds. At the earliest opportunity,
open the hood and reset the air filter
restriction gauge.

Refer to Air filter and restriction gauge in
the Maintenance chapter for more
information. See Changing the Engine
Air Filter (page 363).

182

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Operation in Standing Water

•

Ingestion of water into the diesel engine
can result in immediate and severe
damage to the engine. If driving through
water, slow down to avoid splashing water
into the intake. If the engine stalls, and you
suspect ingestion of water into the engine,
do not try to restart the engine. Consult
your dealer for service immediately.

•

•

Your fuel tank vents to the atmosphere by
valves on top of the tank and through the
fuel cap. If water reaches the top of the
tank, the valves may pull water into the
fuel tank. Water in the fuel can cause
performance issues and damage the fuel
injection system.

•

A chime sounds and the information
display will show ENGINE TURNS OFF
IN 30 (seconds) and start counting
down
You can restart the five or 15-minute
timer by changing the position of the
accelerator pedal, brake pedal or the
park brake within the final 30 seconds
When the timer reaches zero, the
engine shuts down and this message
will appear in your information display
ENGINE TURNED OFF
One minute after the engine has shut
down, the electrical system simulates
key off, even though the ignition is still
in the on position, initiating normal
accessory delay period
You must move the ignition to the off
position to reset the system before
restarting your vehicle.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
- 6.7L DIESEL

•

Switch the ignition off.

The engine idle shutdown idle timer does
not start if:

To help prolong engine life, we
recommended you allow the engine to idle
for three to five minutes, especially after
any of the following:
• Continuous engine speed.
• High ambient temperature.
• High GVW or GCW operation, for
example heavy loads or trailers.

•
•
•

The engine is operating in power
take-off mode.
The engine coolant temperature is
below 60°F (16°C).
The exhaust emission control device is
regenerating.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If

This allows the turbo charged engine to
cool down.

Equipped)

WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.

ENGINE IDLE SHUTDOWN
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine idle shutdown system. This system
automatically shuts down your engine
when it has been idling in P (Park) or N
(Neutral) for five minutes (parking brake
set) or 15 minutes (parking brake not set).
When the engine idle shutdown process
has started:

Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.

183

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
•

Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).

•
•

For cold climates that are below 0°F
(-18°C) needing a temporary battery
installation. Order the cold climate pack.
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.

•
•

•

•

Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
Do not use multiple extension cords.
Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.

Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.

E236180

We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• locate the block heater cord in the front
tow hook pocket.
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.

The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.

184

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
•

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.

•

Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.

•

Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is
a cancer-causing agent.

•

When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

•

Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.

185

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, wash the affected areas
immediately with plenty of soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience any adverse reactions.

Fuel and Refueling
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.

FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
identifiers:
• Yellow fuel filler cap.
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
• Yellow fuel filler housing.
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
door.

Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87.

The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.

For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 272).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

186

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline

Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16-500 ppm) or high sulfur
diesel fuel (greater than 500
ppm) in your diesel engine will cause
certain emission components to
malfunction which may also cause the
service engine soon light to illuminate
indicating an emissions-related concern.

We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.

Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
temperature. For best results at
temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), it is
recommended to use a diesel fuel which
has been seasonally adjusted for the
ambient conditions.

FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL

Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Not Required

Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands And Other Locales)

For the engine to operate reliably on
low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the
engine must be a factory built high-sulfur
engine (available as a dealer order option
for select markets) or an ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel configured engine that has been
retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using
Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
Failure to use retrofit components other
than those available through your
authorized dealer will result in coolant
system damage, engine overheating,
selective catalyst reduction system or
diesel particulate filter damage and
possible base engine damage.

You should use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel
fuel (also known as ULSD) designated as
number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of
15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You
may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels
containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20. These fuels should meet
the ASTM D975 diesel or the ASTM D7467
B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications.
Outside of North America, use fuels
meeting EN590 or equivalent local market
standard.

Use only a diesel engine configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
designed to use only Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel fuel may result in damage to engine
emission control devices and the
aftertreatment system, potentially
rendering the vehicle inoperable.

Note: The vehicle Warranty does not cover
damage caused by using an improper type
of fuel or fuel additive.
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with
diesel fuel under any circumstances.
Blending used oil with the fuel will
significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust
emissions and reduce engine life due to
increased internal wear.

187

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Vehicles with engines configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel are only
available for sale in countries where ultra
low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
available or mandated by the government.
Vehicles originally sold in a ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel market that are subsequently
exported to non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel
markets will need to be retrofitted (at the
customer’s expense using Ford authorized
dealer service parts) in order to be reliably
operated on non- ultra low sulfur diesel
fuel.

•

•
•

•

Follow the recommended service
maintenance intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).
Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
tank for more than 1 month
Consider changing brands or reducing
biodiesel content if you have cold
temperature fuel gelling issues or a
frequent LOW FUEL PRESSURE
message appearing
Do NOT use raw oils, fats or waste
cooking greases

Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater
than 20% may cause damage to your
vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
after-treatment hardware (exhaust
catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
Concentrations greater than 20% can also
cause fuel filter restrictions that may result
in a lack of power or damage to fuel
system components, including fuel pump
and fuel injector failures.

Biodiesel
WARNING
Do not mix diesel with gasoline,
gasohol or alcohol. This could cause
an explosion.
Note: Do not use home heating oil,
agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste
cooking greases, biodiesel fuels greater than
20% or any diesel fuel not intended for
highway use. Red dye is used to identify
fuels intended for agricultural and
non-highway use. Damage to the fuel
injection system, engine and exhaust
catalyst can occur if an improper fuel is
used.

SAE 5W-40 or SAE 15W-40 oil is
recommended for fuels with greater than
5% biodiesel (B5). Refer to the Special
operating conditions section under the
Schedule Maintenance chapter for more
information about oil change intervals and
other maintenance when operating on
biodiesel.

You may operate your vehicle on diesel
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20.

Look for a label on the fuel pump to
confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel content is often
indicated with the letter B followed by the
percent of biodiesel in the fuel. For
example, B20 indicates a fuel containing
20% biodiesel. Ask the service station
attendant to confirm the biodiesel content
of a diesel fuel if you do not see a label on
the fuel pump.

Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted
product from renewable fuel sources, such
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste
cooking greases.
To help achieve acceptable engine
performance and durability when using
biodiesel in your vehicle:
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality
that complies with industry standards

188

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than
diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
should not be stored in the fuel tank for
more than 1 month. If you plan to park or
store your vehicle for more than 1 month,
then you should empty your vehicle fuel
tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the
tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel
fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of
30 minutes.

FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
Choosing the Right Fuel

Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
damage fuel system seals and plastics and
corrode steel parts.

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

During cold weather, if you have problems
operating on biodiesel, you may need to
use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel
content, try another brand, or discontinue
the use of biodiesel.

Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. We do not recommend
these fuels.

Diesel Fuel Additives
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms
to ASTM industry specifications.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine.

For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 272).

Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an
equivalent cetane booster additive if you
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use
Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance
improver or an equivalent additive if there
is fuel gelling.

Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

Do not use alcohol-based additives to
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol
additives may result in damage to the fuel
injectors and system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432).

Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that will not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.

The Vehicle Warranty may not cover
repairs needed to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product that does
not meet Ford specifications in your fuel.

Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.

189

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.

•

•

You may need to cycle the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the
fuel from the tank to the engine. On
restarting, cranking time will take a few
seconds longer than normal. With
keyless ignition, just start the engine.
Crank time will be longer than usual.
Normally, adding 1 gal (4 L) of fuel is
enough to restart the engine. If the
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gal (4 L) may be
required.

REFUELING - GASOLINE

The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.

WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling.

We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines to help minimize engine deposits
and maintain optimal vehicle and engine
performance. For additional information,
refer to www.toptiergas.com.

Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.

Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
engine components.

Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.

If you have run out of fuel:

Do not use personal electronic
devices while refueling.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.

190

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed
design with a 1/4th turn on and off feature.
When fueling your vehicle:

WARNINGS
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.

1. Put your vehicle in park (P).
2. Switch the engine off.
3. Carefully turn the filler cap
counterclockwise until it spins off.
4. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel
filler pipe.
5. To install the cap, align the tabs on the
cap with the notches on the filler pipe.
6. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a
turn clockwise until it clicks at least
once.

Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.

If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel
Cap message appears in the instrument
cluster and stays on after you start the
engine, you may not have installed the fuel
filler properly.
If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next
opportunity, safely pull off of the road,
remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
light or Check fuel cap message may not
reset immediately. It may take several
driving cycles for the indicators to turn off.
A driving cycle consists of an engine
start-up (after four or more hours with the
engine off) followed by normal city and
highway driving.

Fuel Filler Cap
WARNINGS
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler
cap, excessive pressure or vacuum
in the fuel tank may damage the fuel
system or cause the fuel cap to disengage
in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.

REFUELING - DIESEL
WARNINGS
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle.

Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
replace it with a fuel filler cap that is
designed for your vehicle. The customer
warranty may be void for any damage to the
fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified
fuel filler cap is not used.

Keep children away from the fuel
pump. Never let children pump fuel.

191

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Fueling Tips

WARNINGS
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.

If air is allowed to enter the fuel system the
engine automatically purges any trapped
air. To purge the air sooner: prior to engine
start, prime the system by turning the key
to on for 30 seconds then to off. Repeat
this several times. The engine may run
rough and produce white smoke while air
is in the system. This is normal.

Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

Use only clean, approved containers that
will prevent the entry of dirt or water
whenever you store diesel fuel.
Diesel fuel must not be stored in a
galvanized container. The fuel will dissolve
the zinc in the galvanized container. The
zinc will then remain in the fuel. If you run
the contaminated fuel through the engine,
the zinc will deposit in the fuel injectors
causing expensive-to-repair damage.

Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.

Diesel fuel dispensing nozzle fill rate

The fuel system may be under
pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing
sound, wait until it stops before completely
removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel
may spray out and injure you or others.

Your vehicle has a fuel fill pipe that is able
to accept fuel up to 20 gal (76 L) per
minute from an 1.2 in (30 mm)
fuel-dispensing nozzle. Pumping fuel at
greater flow rates may result in premature
nozzle shut-off or spit back.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler
cap, excessive pressure or vacuum
in the fuel tank may damage the fuel
system or cause the fuel cap to disengage
in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.

Truck stops have pumps and nozzles
designed for larger, heavy-duty trucks.
When refueling at truck stops: if the nozzle
shuts off repeatedly when refueling, wait
5–10 seconds; then use a slower rate of
flow, do not depress the nozzle trigger as
far.

Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
replace it with a fuel filler cap designed for
your vehicle. The vehicle Warranty may be
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel
system if the correct genuine Ford or
Motorcraft® fuel filler cap is not used.

Refueling
When fueling your vehicle do the following:
1.

192

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
filler cap. The fuel tank filler cap has
an indexed design with a 1/4 turn
on/off feature. Carefully turn the filler
cap counterclockwise until it spins off.

Fuel and Refueling

A

E119081

4. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.

E139202

2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.

Dual Fuel Tanks (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a dual fuel tank
delivery system which operates
independently and automatically. The fuel
pump in the front fuel tank delivers fuel to
the engine. When the fuel level in the front
fuel tank drops below three quarter full,
fuel automatically transfers from the rear
fuel tank to the front fuel tank. Whenever
there is fuel in the rear fuel tank, the front
fuel tank level remains between half and
three quarter full.

A

E139203

Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel, you
must add fuel to the front fuel tank to
restart the engine.

B

3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel
tank is full.

FUEL CONSUMPTION
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
193

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.

Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 113).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Incorrect tire inflation pressures. See
Towing a Trailer (page 272).
Fully loading your vehicle.
Carrying unnecessary weight.
Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 186).
Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.

194

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
Tampering With a Noise Control
System

EMISSION LAW
WARNING

Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.

Do not remove or alter the original
equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal
floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in fire or personal injury.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.

U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.

If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.

195

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
•
•

Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.

WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.

Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance

To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 305).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.

On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.

Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.

The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.

196

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
1.

Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 190).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.

Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.

You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.

If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.

Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.

Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.

When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:

If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.

197

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.

SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTANT SYSTEM - DIESEL
Your vehicle may have a selective catalytic
reduction system. The system helps reduce
emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from
the exhaust system. The system
automatically injects diesel exhaust fluid
into the exhaust system to enable correct
selective catalytic reduction system
function.

If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.

Note: Selective catalytic reduction systems
are not fitted to vehicles in markets where
only high-sulfur diesel fuel is available.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level
In order for the system to operate correctly
you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid
level.
A warning message appears in the
information display when the diesel
exhaust fluid level is low. If a warning
message appears, refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank as soon as possible. See
Information Messages (page 129).

The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:

Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Tank

1.

15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.

WARNINGS
Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of
reach of children. Avoid contact with
skin, eyes or clothing. In case of
contact with your eyes, flush immediately
with water and get prompt medical
attention. In case of contact with your skin,
clean immediately with soap and water. If
you swallow any diesel exhaust fluid, drink
plenty of water, call a physician
immediately.

If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.

198

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
WARNINGS
Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank in a well ventilated area. When
you remove the diesel exhaust fluid
tank filler cap or a diesel exhaust fluid
container cap, ammonia vapors may
escape. Ammonia vapors can be irritating
to skin, eyes and mucous membranes.
Inhaling ammonia vapors can cause
burning to the eyes, throat and nose and
cause coughing and watery eyes.

)

E163354
E163354

Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). Non-certified diesel exhaust
fluid use can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
fuel tank. This can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at
an authorized dealer, most highway truck
stops or you can contact roadside
assistance for help in finding a retailer that
sells diesel exhaust fluid. In addition, there
is a government website to help you find
the nearest location to purchase diesel
exhaust fluid:
http://www.discoverdef.com.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using
a nozzle is similar to fuel fill. The nozzle
shuts off automatically when the tank is
full.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Container

E226045

The following procedure applies to
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar
fluid containers. Always follow the
manufacturer's instructions.

The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue
filler cap. The tank is behind the left-hand
front wheel. Fill the tank using a fluid pump
at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a
diesel exhaust fluid container. We
recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust
fluid. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 427).

1.

199

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap. Place the spout on to
the container and tighten it until you
feel a strong resistance.

Engine Emission Control
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning
Messages and Vehicle Operations

2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap.
3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until
the seal on the spout seats on to the
filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank.
When the tank is full the fluid will stop
flowing automatically.
4. Return the container to the vertical
position slightly below the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid
remaining in the spout to drain back in
to the container.
5. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the
diesel exhaust fluid tank cap.
6. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid container and replace the
cap.
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in
the container retain it for later use. The
spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with
clean water prior to storage. Do not use the
diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
fluid.

WARNINGS
Diesel exhaust fluid must be refilled
when low or replaced when
contaminated or your vehicle speed
becomes limited to 50 mph (80 km/h). In
these conditions, drive with caution and
refill diesel exhaust fluid immediately. If
the diesel exhaust fluid becomes empty
or contaminated and fluid is not replaced,
your vehicle becomes limited to engine idle
only once stopped. In these conditions, be
cautious where you stop your vehicle
because you may not be able to drive long
distances or maintain highway speeds until
you refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid.
Tampering with or disabling the
selective catalytic reduction system
results in severe vehicle performance
limitation including eventual speed limiting
to 5 mph (8 km/h).
The information display shows a series of
messages about the amount of diesel
exhaust fluid available. A systems check
displays messages indicating the amount
of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays
a warning message indicating the
approximate distance remaining as the
fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears
empty. See Information Messages
(page 129).

Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in
Cold Climates
Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the
ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
Your vehicle has a preheating system
which allows diesel exhaust fluid to
operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not
use your vehicle for an extended period
when the ambient temperature is below
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid
freezes it may damage the tank. This is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.

As the diesel exhaust fluid level
nears empty, the warning
E163176
symbol displays and a series of
tones and messages starting at 500 mi
(800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust
fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and
messages continue until you refill the
diesel exhaust fluid tank.

200

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
•

Continued driving without refilling results
in the following actions as required by the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA):
• Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message
appears in the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
refilling the diesel exhaust fluid tank
causes the engine to enter an idle-only
condition. This only occurs upon vehicle
refueling or at an extended idle. A
message indicates the required actions
to resume normal operation. It is
required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal
(3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the
tank to exit the idle-only condition, but
your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting
mode until you refill the tank
completely.

•

•
•

•

•

Note: For either vehicle speed limiting or
idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation
resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank.
Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid
tank from empty, there may be a short delay
before detecting the increased level of fluid.
The increased level detection must occur
before your vehicle returns to full power.

•
•

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines
and Information
•

•
•
•
•

Use only diesel exhaust fluid that
carries the American Petroleum
Institute (API) certified diesel exhaust
fluid trademark or ISO 22241.
Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
diesel fuel tank.
Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive.
Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid
container once it is emptied.
201

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on
painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic
components. Immediately wipe away
any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled
with a damp cloth and water. If it has
already crystallized, use warm water
and a sponge.
Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct
sunlight and in temperatures between
23°F (-5°C) and 68°F (20°C).
Diesel exhaust fluid freezes below 12°F
(-11°C).
Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid
bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could
cause damage to interior components
or release an ammonia odor inside your
vehicle.
Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable,
non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble
liquid.
The system has a diesel exhaust fluid
quality sensor. Dilution of diesel
exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid
in the SCR system leads to a diesel
exhaust fluid system fault, eventually
leading to the vehicle only operating in
idle-only mode.
Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
water or any other liquid.
An ammonia odor may be smelled
when the cap is removed or during
refill. Refill diesel exhaust fluid in a well
ventilated area.

Engine Emission Control
Typical Diesel Exhaust Fluid Usage
When Using the Power Take Off (PTO)

Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only
condition, normal vehicle operation resumes
when you repair the contaminated system.
To service a contaminated or inoperative
system, see an authorized dealer.

Continuous PTO use—Minimal PTO use

0–7,800 mi (0–12,550 km)

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER

Contaminated Diesel Exhaust
Fluid or Inoperative Selective
Catalytic Reduction System

The filter forms part of the emissions
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
exhaust gas.

Selective catalytic reduction systems are
sensitive to contamination of the diesel
exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the
fluid is important to avoid system
malfunctions. If you remove or drain the
diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the
same fluid to refill the tank. The system
has a sensor to monitor fluid quality.

Regeneration
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after you
have switched the engine off. This is a
potential fire hazard.

A warning lamp illuminates and
a message appears in the
E163176
information display if the system
becomes contaminated or inoperative.
Continued driving without replacing diesel
exhaust fluid or having the selective
catalytic reduction system repaired results
in the following actions as required by the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA):
• Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message
appears in the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
replacing contaminated diesel exhaust
fluid causes the engine to enter an
idle-only condition. This only occurs
upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in
park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for
10 minutes or more and is indicated by
a message in the information display
indicating required actions to resume
normal operation.

Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration
process.
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
out this process automatically.

202

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
If your journeys meet one of the following
conditions:
• You drive only short distances.
• You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.

Your vehicle has a diesel particulate filter.
The diesel particulate filter is an inline filter
in the exhaust system that reduces carbon
emissions by trapping exhaust particles
before they reach the tailpipe. The diesel
particulate filter looks similar to a
traditional exhaust catalyst and is part of
the exhaust system under your vehicle. The
filter couples to a diesel oxidation catalyst
that reduces the amount of harmful
exhaust emitted from the tailpipe. As soot
gathers in the system, it begins to restrict
the filter. The system must periodically
clean the soot that gathers inside the filter.
This is carried out in two ways, passive
regeneration and active regeneration. Both
methods occur automatically and require
no actions from the driver. During either
one of these regeneration methods, you
may notice a change in exhaust tone. At
certain times, the information display
shows various messages related to the
diesel particulate filter. See Information
Messages (page 129).

You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.

Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance
You must properly maintain your vehicle's
diesel particulate filter in order for it to
function properly.

Oxidation Catalytic Converter and
Diesel Particulate Filter System (If

Do not disregard maintenance messages
that appear in the information display.
Failure to follow the instructions of an
information message may degrade vehicle
performance and could lead to engine
damage that may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.

Equipped)

WARNING
The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter or the diesel particulate
filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic
converter and the diesel particulate filter
heat up to very high temperatures after
only a short period of engine operation and
remain hot after you switch the engine off.

Failure to perform active or operator
commanded regeneration when instructed
could result in a clogged diesel particulate
filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills
beyond the regeneration threshold, your
vehicle disables the ability for active and
operator commanded regeneration. This
could result in irreversible damage to the
diesel particulate filter requiring
replacement that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
203

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
Passive Regeneration

shows a cleaning exhaust filter message,
which is the normal regeneration process.
You can also choose operator commanded
regeneration to clean the exhaust system
at this point. See Information Messages
(page 129).

In passive regeneration, the exhaust
system temperature and constituents
automatically clean the filter by oxidizing
the soot. Cleaning automatically occurs
during normal vehicle operating conditions
due to driving patterns.

If you are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic active
regeneration or you choose to perform
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter
while at idle, then operator commanded
regeneration would need to be performed.

Active Regeneration
Once the diesel particulate filter is full of
exhaust particles, the engine control
module commands the exhaust system to
clean the filter through active regeneration.
Active regeneration requires the engine
computer to raise the exhaust temperature
to eliminate the particles. During cleaning,
the particles convert to harmless gasses.
Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter
continues trapping exhaust particles.

Operator Commanded Regeneration
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, a drive time is less than 10 15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully
warm up, passive and active regeneration
may not sufficiently clean the diesel
particulate filter system. Operator
commanded regeneration allows you to
manually start regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter at idle to clean the filter.
If you are not sure whether your vehicle has
this feature, contact an authorized dealer.

The regeneration process operates more
efficiently when you drive your vehicle at
a constant speed above 30 mph
(48 km/h) and at a steady engine speed
for approximately 20 minutes. The
frequency and duration of regeneration
fluctuates by how you drive your vehicle,
outside air temperature and altitude. For
most driving, regeneration frequency varies
from 100–500 mi (160–805 km) between
occurrences and each occurrence lasts
9–35 minutes. You can usually reduce the
duration of regeneration if you maintain a
constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h).

When to Carry Out Operator Commanded
Regeneration
You can use the operator commanded
regeneration feature when a message
appears in the information display and you
are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic active
regeneration or if you choose to manually
start the regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter manually while the vehicle
is idle. See Information Messages (page
129).

When the engine control module detects
that the diesel particulate filter is nearly
full of particulates and you are not
operating your vehicle in a manner to allow
effective automatic regeneration,
messages appear in the information
display as a reminder for you to drive your
vehicle in order to clean the diesel
particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle
in a manner to allow effective automatic
regeneration, the information display

204

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
How to Start Operator Commanded
Regeneration

Operator Commanded Regeneration
Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position
WARNINGS
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after you
have switched the engine off. This is a
potential fire hazard.

WARNING
Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe
during regeneration. Hot exhaust
gases can burn you badly.
Note: You cannot use the operator
commanded regeneration until the diesel
particulate filter load percentage has
reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter
load percentage fluctuates up and down
when driving your vehicle due to active and
passive regenerations.

Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe
during regeneration. Hot exhaust
gases can burn you badly.

Note: During the use of operator
commanded regeneration, you may observe
a light amount of white smoke. This is
normal.

Make sure that the louvers located at the
tip of the exhaust are clear of any
obstructions as they are used to introduce
fresh air into the tailpipe to cool the
exhaust gases as they leave the exhaust
system.

You may not be able to use
operator commanded
regeneration if the service engine
soon warning lamp appears in the
information display

Before you start operator commanded
regeneration, do the following:
• Shift into park (P) and apply the
parking brake, on stable, level ground.
• Park your vehicle outside of any
structure.
• Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m)
away from any obstructions and away
from materials that can easily combust
or melt, for example paper, leaves,
petroleum products, fuels, plastics and
other dry organic material.
• Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8
tank of fuel.
• Make sure all fluids are at proper levels.

Information Display Procedure
Start with your vehicle engine and when it
has reached the normal operating
temperature, press the information display
control button on the steering wheel. See
Information Display Control (page 85).
If a message advising that the exhaust
filter is full appears in the information
display, press the OK button as instructed.
Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
the next prompts regarding the exhaust
position required to initiate operator
commanded regeneration. Be sure to
understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished.

205

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at
saturation, a message requesting
permission to initiate filter cleaning
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 129).
Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
the next prompts regarding exhaust
position required to initiate operator
commanded regeneration. Be sure to
understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished. You can also drive to
clean the filter.

Operator Commanded Regeneration
with Automatic Regeneration Control
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system. You can switch off automatic
regeneration until better driving conditions
are available, for example steady high
speed driving. You can then switch
automatic regeneration back on to clean
the diesel particulate filter.

When the system is at the point
of oversaturation, the service
engine warning lamp illuminates
and a message appears in the information
display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning.
You must have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.

Switching Automatic Regeneration
Control On and Off
To switch operator commanded
regeneration on and off, use the
information display control on the steering
wheel. See Information Display Control
(page 85). Scroll to the exhaust cleaning
message, a check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.

Once operator commanded regeneration
starts, engine speed increases to
approximately 2000 rpm and the cooling
fan speed increases. You will hear a
change in audible sound due to engine
speed and cooling fan speed increases.

How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator
Commanded Regeneration

It is not necessary to open the hood on the
engine compartment. Once operator
commanded regeneration completes, the
engine speed returns to normal idling. The
exhaust system remains very hot for
several minutes even after regeneration is
complete. Do not reposition the vehicle
over materials that could burn until the
exhaust system has had sufficient time to
cool. Depending on the amount of soot
collected by the diesel particulate filter,
ambient temperature and altitude,
operator commanded regeneration lasts
approximately 30 minutes.

If you need to cancel the operator
commanded regeneration, pressing the
brake, accelerator or switching the engine
off stops the procedure. Depending on the
amount of time you allowed the operator
commanded regeneration to operate, soot
may not have had sufficient time to be fully
eliminated, but the exhaust system and
exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut
your vehicle off during operator
commanded regeneration, you may notice
turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence
caused by shutting off a diesel engine
during boosted operation and is considered
normal.

206

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
Filter Service and Maintenance
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
If filter service is required, the
engine control system warning
lamp illuminates in the
information display.
If there are any issues with the
diesel particulate filter system,
the engine control system
warning lamp and a service
engine soon warning lamp
illuminate to inform you that
your vehicle requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly
Maintenance
Aftermarket devices or modifications to
the exhaust system may reduce the
effectiveness of the exhaust system as
well as cause damage to the exhaust
system or engine. This may also degrade
vehicle performance and could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.

207

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Transmission
Park (P)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.

WARNINGS
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.

Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).

When your vehicle is stationary, keep
the brake pedal fully pressed when
shifting gears. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury,
death or property damage.

Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.

Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The drive function
allows automatic upshifts and downshifts
through gears one through six.

Understanding the Shift Positions
of Your Automatic Transmission
(If Equipped)

M (Manual)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the
driver can change gears up or down as
desired. By moving the gearshift lever from
drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you
now have control of selecting the gear you
desire using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission later in this
section.

E163183

Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:

To return to normal drive (D) position,
move the shift lever back from manual (M)
to drive (D).

1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).

The transmission operates in gears one
through six.
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.

208

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Transmission
First (1)
•
•
•
•

The tow/haul feature:
• Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
assists you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount you press the
brake pedal.

Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
Provides maximum engine braking.
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift
lever.
Does not downshift into first (1) gear
at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.

Forced downshifts
•
•
•

Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
Press the accelerator to the floor.
Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.

The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
tow/haul.

Tow/Haul Mode
WARNING
Do not use tow/haul when the road
surface is slippery. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle.

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
Adaptive Steering System, enabling the
tow/haul feature adjusts the steering
response. In tow/haul mode the Adaptive
Steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity
to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds
when maintaining the ease of parking and
maneuverability at low speeds. See
Steering (page 259).

To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever
E161509
once. The TOW HAUL indicator
light illuminates in the instrument cluster.

To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever when
tow/haul is active. The TOW HAUL light
deactivates. Tow/haul also deactivates
when you power down your vehicle.

209

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Transmission
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (If Equipped)

The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
PRS (Progressive Range Selection)
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience (for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep grade).
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The available
and selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.

E163184

All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Press the – button again to
lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: press the – button twice to
lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only the
available gears display and the
transmission automatically shifts between
the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears to allow the transmission to
shift to higher gears. The transmission
shifts automatically within the gear range
you select.

Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically make
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.

Manual (M)
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
(M) position allows you to manually select
the gear you desire. Only the current gear
displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift
lever to manually select gears. Press the
+ button to upshift or the – button to
downshift. Return the transmission to a
different gearshift position to deactivate
manual control.

SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.

Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:

210

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Transmission

Upshifts When Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy)

Shift from:

Gasoline engines

Diesel engines

1–2

15 mph (24 km/h)

12 mph (19 km/h)

2–3

25 mph (40 km/h)

19 mph (31 km/h)

3–4

40 mph (64 km/h)

26 mph (42 km/h)

4–5

45 mph (72 km/h)

34 mph (55 km/h)

5–6

50 mph (80 km/h)

46 mph (74 km/h)

Note: Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.

Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning

Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents the
gearshift lever from moving from park (P)
when the ignition is on and the brake pedal
is not pressed.

This feature's design is to increase
durability and provide consistent shift feel
over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle
or transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is normal and
does not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation. Additionally, whenever you
disconnect the battery or install a new
battery, the system must relearn the
strategy.

If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition is on
and the brake pedal pressed, a malfunction
may have occurred. It is possible that a
fuse has blown or your vehicle’s brake
lamps are not operating properly. See
Fuse Specification Chart (page 317).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure allows you to move the gearshift
lever from park (P):

Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.

1.

Apply the parking brake. Switch the
ignition key to 1 (off), then remove the
key.
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.

If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

211

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Transmission
4. Place fingers into hole where you
removed the gearshift lever boot and
pull top half of shroud up and forward
to separate it from the lower half of the
shroud. There is a hinge at the forward
edge of the top shroud. Roll the top
half of the shroud upward on the hinge
point to clear the hazard flasher button,
then pull straight rearward toward the
driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.

E163186

9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as you rotate the halves together.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.

E163185

7.

Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
8. Apply the brake. Gently lift the override
disk and move the gearshift lever into
neutral (N).

If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, you
may rock it out by shifting between forward
and reverse gears, stopping between shifts
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.

212

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Transmission
POWER TAKE-OFF (If Equipped)
WARNING
Use of auxiliary equipment that
exceeds the maximum Power
Take-Off (PTO) load specified in the
Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book can
adversely affect the performance of the
powertrain system. Refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about
the appropriate installation of additional
equipment.
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off,
or PTO, is often added to the engine or
transmission to operate utility equipment.
Examples include a wheel-lift for tow
trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire
service, and pumping fluids. PTO
applications draw auxiliary horsepower
from the powertrain, often while the
vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there
is limited cooling air flow through the
radiator and around the vehicle that
normally occurs when a vehicle is moving.
The aftermarket PTO system installer,
having the most knowledge of the final
application, is responsible for determining
whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and
alerting the user to the safe and proper
operation.
Ford Super Duty Vehicles are approved for
use as a stationary (including split shaft
capability) or mobile power source, within
limits and operating guidelines detailed in
the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas,
and through the Ford Truck Body Builders
Advisory Service.

213

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: For important information regarding
the safe operation of this type of vehicle,
see General Information in the Wheels and
Tires chapter.

LOCK

Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4X4 mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these
surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks), but will not damage
drive components.

F RE E

E163187

The 4WD system is engaged or disengaged
by rotating the control for both front wheel
hub locks from the FREE or LOCK position,
then manually engaging or disengaging the
transfer case with the floor-mounted
shifter. For increased fuel economy in 2WD,
rotate both hub locks to the FREE position.

Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper operation.

Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly
(ESOF) 4WD system (If Equipped)

Note: You can switch on and switch off the
electronic locking differential by pulling the
4WD control (4WD vehicles) or turning the
electronic locking differential control (2WD
vehicles). See Electronic Locking
Differential (page 223).

Note: If 4X4 Low is selected while the
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper system operation.

Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS)
4WD system (If Equipped)

Note: Auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating the hub lock
control from AUTO to LOCK.

Note: The vehicle should not be driven in
4X4 High or 4X4 Low modes with the hub
locks set to FREE as this condition may
damage driveline system components.

LOCK

A U TO

E163188

214

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
4X4 LOW

For proper operation, make sure that each
hub is fully engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both
set to LOCK or both set to AUTO). To
engage LOCK, turn the hub locks
completely clockwise; to engage AUTO,
turn the hub locks completely
counterclockwise.

Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
E181780

CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.

The ESOF 4WD system:
•

•

•

•

provides 4x4 High engagement and
disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
is operated by a rotary control located
on the instrument panel that allows
you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low
operation.
uses auto-manual hub locks that can
be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode
selected.
will increase fuel economy when used
in the hub lock's recommended AUTO
mode.

Using a Manual Shift On Stop
(MSOS) 4WD system (If Equipped)
Note: High shift efforts may be encountered
when attempting to shift into and out of 4x4
modes. It is recommended to allow the
vehicle to roll at a speed below 3 mph
(5 km/h) when shifting between modes.

4WD Indicator Lights
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.

E233846

2H (4X2)
For general on-road driving. Sends power
to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds

4X2
Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
E163173

4H (4X4 High)

4X4 HIGH

Used for extra traction such as in snow or
icy roads or in off road situations. This
mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.

Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.
E181779

215

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to the
desired position.
4. If the transfer case does not, or only
partially moves to the desired position,
perform a shift with the transmission
in N (Neutral) and the vehicle rolling at
a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
5. If shifting to 2H with the vehicle at a
complete stop, disengage the locking
hubs (optional) by rotating the hub
lock control from LOCK to FREE.

N (Neutral)
Only used when towing the vehicle. No
power to front or rear wheels.
4L (4X4 Low)
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum
power to all four wheels at reduced
speeds. Intended only for off road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades or pulling heavy objects.
Shifting between system modes

Using the N (Neutral) position

Note: Do not perform these operations if
the rear wheels are slipping or when
applying the accelerator pedal.

WARNING
Always set the parking brake and
leave your vehicle with the
transmission in park (P).

Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4
system shifts or engages. This is normal. In
order to reduce engagement noise, it is
recommended that all shifts be performed
at speeds below3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in
4X4 High with the hub locks disengaged as
this condition may damage driveline system
components.
Engage the locking hubs by rotating the
hub lock control from FREE to LOCK, then
move the transfer case lever from 2H to
4H at a stop or a vehicle speed below
3 mph (5 km/h).
Move the transfer case lever from 4H to
2H at a stop or a vehicle speed below
3 mph (5 km/h), then disengage the
locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub
lock control from LOCK to FREE.

E233846

For proper operation, make sure that both
hubs are set to either FREE or LOCK.

The transfer case neutral position overrides
the transmission and puts the vehicle in
neutral regardless of transmission gearshift
lever position. The vehicle can move
forward or backwards.

Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low)

This position should only be used when
towing the vehicle.

1.

Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).

216

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Using the Electronic Shift on the
Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)

Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal when a shift in progress message
displays improves engagement or
disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or when applying
the accelerator pedal.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
You can move the control from 2H or 4H
at a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating
a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
complete the message center will then
display the system mode selected.

E191851

2H (4X2)
For general on-road driving. Sends power
to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.

Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.

4H (4X4 HIGH)

Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use
on dry pavement.

Provides mechanically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels for use in off-road or winter
conditions such as deep snow, sand or
mud. This mode is not for use on dry
pavement.

Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
1.

4L (4X4 LOW)

The information display will display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display will then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not met,
the shift will not occur and the information
display will display information guiding the
driver through the proper shifting
procedures.

Provides mechanically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels for use on low traction surfaces,
but does so with additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication. Intended
only for off-road applications such as deep
sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy
objects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage while
your vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.

217

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Shift Delayed Pull Forward appears in
the information display, transfer case gear
tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a
forward gear, move the vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral to allow the
transfer case to complete the range shift.

You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.

Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles

How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles

Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.

WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a front air dam that can become damaged
(due to reduced ground clearance) when
taking your vehicle off-road. This air dam
can be taken off by removing 15 bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.

Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.

Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On four-wheel
drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you
to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures can be found in this
chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance chapter. You should become
thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.

The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.

Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.

218

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Basic Operating Principles
•

•

•

required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.

Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4H or
4L modes are only intended for
consistently slippery or loose surfaces.

In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).

If Your Vehicle leaves the Road

Sand

If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been reduced
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.

When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.

It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.

It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.

Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.

Emergency Maneuvers

Mud and Water

In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are

Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.

219

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.

If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.

Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.

Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.

220

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow

Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING

WARNING

If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.

Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.

Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.

Parking
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.

Always set the parking brake and
leave your vehicle with the
transmission in park (P).
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are
disconnected from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if
the automatic transmission is in P (Park)
or the manual transmission is in gear. Do
not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position.
Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.

Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 227).

221

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.

222

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Rear Axle
•

LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
This axle provides added traction on
slippery surfaces, particularly when one
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration
during tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the
axle is working.

•

ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped)

•

Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.

•

The electronic locking differential is a
device housed in the rear axle that allows
both rear wheels to turn at the same
speed. The electronic locking differential
can provide additional traction should your
vehicle become stuck. You can activate
the differential electronically and shift it
on the fly within the differential operating
speed range. The differential is for use in
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where you need maximum traction. It is
not for use on dry pavement.

When you switch the system on, if you do
not meet the required conditions for
electronic locking differential activation,
the instrument cluster will display the
appropriate information guiding you
through the proper activation process.

Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential

The following conditions will affect the
electronic locking differential:
•

•

The electronic locking differential may
not engage if you press your
accelerator pedal during an
engagement attempt. A message may
display in the instrument display
guiding you to release the accelerator
pedal.
In 4x2 or 4x4 High modes, the
electronic locking differential will
automatically disengage at speeds
above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will
automatically reengage at speeds
below 20 mph (32 km/h).
In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking
differential will automatically
disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically
reengage at speeds below 56 mph
(90 km/h).
The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the
electronic locking differential and
disable it during driving maneuvers
when necessary.

Note: Do not use electronic locking
differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Doing so will produce excessive noise,
vibration and increase tire wear.

The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2 or 4x4
High modes.
The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4
Low.

Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.

223

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Rear Axle
For 4WD vehicles

•
•

•

E227398

Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.
For 2WD vehicles

E183740

Turn the control to ON.
Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
E163170
display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the
indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:

224

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

The vehicle speed is too high.
The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by a message in the
information display. See your
authorized Ford dealer for assistance.

Brakes
Anti-lock Brake System

GENERAL INFORMATION

This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.

This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise.

If the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated after you
E144522
release the parking brake, have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer.

See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 108).
E144522

It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.

Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Shift the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.

Diesel Engine Exhaust Braking (If
Equipped)

WARNINGS
Do not use tow/haul when the road
surface is slippery. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not use diesel engine exhaust
braking when the road surface is
slippery. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle.

Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.

This feature increases engine braking at
higher engine speeds to provide better
grade descent control with less brake and
transmission wear and tear.
Note: Use this when driving downhill and
carrying heavy loads or trailering.
225

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Brakes
Benefits of engine braking are:
• Lower brake temperature.
• Reduced brake fade.
• Longer brake life.
• Improved driving and trailering control.

E171217

Note: This feature offers smoother, less
aggressive engine braking during downhill
descents. It may not apply braking if the
vehicle speed is not increasing, although it
will apply full engine braking force when
needed to prevent acceleration. The system
automatically activates the engine brake
and, if necessary, downshifts the
transmission to lower gears to not exceed
your vehicle's set speed when the brake or
accelerator were last released.

Press the button on the switch
bank next to the audio unit to
switch the system on or off.

There are two engine brake modes, manual
and automatic.

Warning Lamp Conditions
•

Manual Engine Braking
1.

Press the button to switch on manual
engine braking.
2. Release the accelerator pedal to
maximize engine braking.
3. Apply the brakes. The transmission
downshifts to lower gears.
Note: The engine braking feature only
functions when you release the accelerator.

•

•

Illuminates when this feature is
switched on and the system is
operating properly. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 108).
Flashes when the engine brake is
disabled due to a fault or the engine
does not meet the required braking
conditions.
Does not illuminate when the switch
or indicator is faulty.

You can switch the system on at anytime.
The system becomes active once the
braking conditions are met.

Note: You can shift the transmission to
lower gears with progressive range selection
(PRS) or manual shifting independent of
pressing the brakes.

Braking Conditions

Note: You can also use manual engine
braking with cruise control to improve grade
descent control.

•
•

Note: If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control, the speed control system uses the
selected engine brake mode, transmission
gears, and brakes to maintain the set speed
and distance to the vehicle being followed.

•

Your vehicle is in a forward gear.
The engine speed is above about 1500
RPM.
Your foot is off the accelerator.

You can use this feature with tow/haul or
progressive range selection to provide
further increased engine braking. The
transmission automatically upshifts to
prevent the engine from entering the red
zone on the tachometer. See Automatic
Transmission (page 208).

Automatic Engine Braking
1.

Press the button twice to switch on
automatic engine braking.
2. Release the accelerator or brake pedal.
The system remembers your vehicle
speed.

226

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Brakes
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNING

WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.

Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
placed in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury. Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.

You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.

PARKING BRAKE

The system will turn off if a
malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to
take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.

Apply the parking brake whenever your
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal
downward to set the parking brake. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.

The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.

To release, pull the brake release lever
located at the lower left side of the
instrument panel.

When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes

227

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.

Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.

The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist
1.

Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill.Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.

Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.

228

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.

E166706

Use the traction and stability control
switch on the instrument panel to switch
the system off or on.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

The switch illuminates when traction
control is off.

WARNING

When you place your vehicle into
four-wheel drive low mode the traction
control disables. Traction control resumes
full operation when you put your vehicle
back into two-wheel drive mode.

The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

System Indicator Lights and
Messages
The stability and traction control
light:
E225465

•
•

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.

•

If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.

Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.

The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
E225466

Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Note: For additional information on the
traction and stability control systems. See
Using Stability Control (page 231).

Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
229

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Stability Control
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.

•
•

•

The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
The Adaptive Steering system (if
equipped) automatically changes the
steering function to a fixed steering
ratio. See Steering (page 259).

If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.

The stability and traction control light
flashes.
Your vehicle slows down.
Reduced engine power.
A vibration in the brake pedal.
The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.

The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.

230

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Stability Control
Roll Stability Control

USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.

AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.

Traction Control

The electronic stability control and roll
stability control portions of the system can
be turned off.

The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 229).

When you shift the transmission into
reverse R, the systems disable.

E130458

Use the traction and stability
control switch on the instrument
panel to switch the systems off

or on.

B

You can switch the traction control portion
of the system off independently.
If you cannot turn the systems off, see the
MyKey chapter for more information.

B
B
A
A

B

A

E72903

A

Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.

B

Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.

231

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Stability Control

AdvanceTrac with RSC Features

Button functions

Stability
control light

Roll stability
control

Electronic
stability
control

Traction
control system

Default at startup

Illuminated
during bulb
check

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Button pressed
momentarily

Illuminated

Enabled

Enabled

1

Disabled

Button pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds

illuminated

3

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Double Press
(Pickup Only)

Illuminated

Enabled

Enabled

Button pressed
again after
deactivation

Not illuminated

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Transfer case
switched to

Illuminated

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

4WD Low
1

1

2

Enabled

4

Electronic stability control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system.

2

Traction control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system.

3

Lamp light starts blinking for four seconds after entering the press and hold state.

4

Engaging 4WD Low automatically disables roll stability control, electronic stability control
and the traction control systems.

232

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Terrain Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL

WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or
extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.

Press and release the hill
descent button located on the
instrument panel. A light in the
cluster will illuminate and a chime will
sound when this feature is activated.
E163957

To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until the desired speed
is reached. To decrease descent speed,
press the brake pedal until the desired
speed is reached.

Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at zero miles per hour (0
kilometers per hour). When stopped,
the parking brake must be applied or the
vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it
may roll away.

Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
the desired descent speed is reached,
remove your feet from the pedals and the
chosen vehicle speed will be maintained.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may
be observed during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.

Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20
mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.

Hill descent modes

Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system will provide a
warning in the message center and a chime
will sound when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.

•

At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed and Hill Descent Control is
active, the Hill Descent Control telltale
will flash.

•

At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed and conditions are not
correct for hill descent activation, the
Hill Descent Control system will be
enabled, the Hill Descent Control
telltale will be solid and a message will
display in the information display.

•

At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed, the Hill Descent Control
system will be enabled, the telltale in
the cluster will not be illuminated and
a message will be displayed in the
information display.

233

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Terrain Control (If Equipped)
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 129).

234

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 63).

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.

The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.

The system may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb reflection.
Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.

When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the
radio volume returns to the previous level.

Traffic control systems, inclement
weather, air brakes, external motors
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.

The sensing system can be switched off
through the information display menu or
from the pop-up message that appears
once you shift the transmission into reverse
(R). See General Information (page 113).

The system may not detect small or
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.

If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and you cannot switch the system
on through the pop-up message. See
Information Messages (page 129).

Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false beeps. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system.

REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms. See your
authorized technician.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings.
Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer
is connected to prevent these warnings.

235

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.

E231381

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.

Reverse your vehicle as slow as
possible, higher speeds may limit
your reaction time to stop your
vehicle.

The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).

Use caution when the tailgate is ajar.
If the tailgate is ajar, the camera will
be out of position and the video
image may be incorrect. All guidelines
disappear when the tailgate is ajar. Some
vehicles may not come equipped with
guidelines.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).

The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.

During operation, lines appear in the
display that represents the path of your
vehicle and proximity to objects behind it.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the display screen. See
Rear View Camera (page 236).

236

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what is being towed behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once the trailer tow connector is engaged.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to
damage to the rear of your vehicle.

E223144

The rear view camera is located on the
tailgate.

Using the Rear View Camera
System
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).

Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
Note: Some vehicles may not come
equipped with guidelines.

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the tailgate is ajar, no rear view camera
features are displayed.
Note: If the image does not turn off while
the transmission is not in reverse (R) and
you are driving over a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), have the system inspected by an
authorized dealer.

237

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids

A

B C

D

Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.

E

Obstacle Distance Indicator

F
E142436

A

Active guidelines

B

Centerline

C

Fixed guideline: Green zone

E190459

D

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone

E

Fixed guideline: Red zone

F

Rear bumper

The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.

To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, the
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.

Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.

The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.

238

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
• You apply the parking brake on vehicles
with a manual transmission.

•

Allows you to see a top-down view of
the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots.
Provides visibility around your vehicle
to you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.

•

Camera Views

360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The 360 degree camera system still
requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of the
windows, and checking the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

E205884

The camera button is located on
the instrument panel. Pressing
the camera button activates the

system.
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
only images from the front cameras are
displayed. Press the camera button to
display the front camera image on the
display screen.

Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.

When in reverse (R), only images from the
rear cameras are displayed. When you shift
into reverse (R), the rear view camera
image automatically shows on the display
screen.

Use caution when turning camera
features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.

Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped)
Additional camera views may be
available for vehicles with
specific features. Press the small
camera icon shown on the top left corner
of the display screen to open the camera
view menu.
E233726

Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras. The
system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.

The following camera views can be
accessed in park (P), neutral (N) or drive
(D) when you press the camera button:
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view.
• Front Normal View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front of your
vehicle.

239

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids
•

•

•

Keep Out Zone

Front Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle.
Rear High View: Provides an image
of your truck bed and can be used to
assist you when backing up to align and
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer.
Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
image from the back of your trailer
while reversing.

The following camera views can be
accessed when you shift into reverse (R):
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal rear camera view next to a 360
degree camera view. Press the zoom
(+) button to quickly access Rear
Normal View from this screen.
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
• Rear Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is behind your
vehicle.
• Rear High View: Provides an image
of your truck bed and can be used to
assist you when backing up to align and
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer.
• Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
image from the back of your trailer
while reversing.
• Trailer Reverse Guidance View:
Provides an image of the rear of your
vehicle using the side cameras, useful
when reversing with a trailer. Use the
arrows at the bottom of the screen to
adjust the side camera position. See
Trailer Reversing Aids (page 274).

E184448

The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.

Front Camera
WARNING
The front camera system still
requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.

E184044

240

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp
Camera (If Equipped)

The front video camera, located in the
grille, provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds. To use the front video camera
system, place the transmission in any gear
except reverse (R). An image will display
once the camera enable button is pressed.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation
and/or road condition.

Side Camera
E231402

The center high-mount stop lamp camera
system is a variant of the rear view camera
that is mounted within the high-mount
stop lamp. It is designed to display the
contents of your truck bed or assist you
when backing up to align and hitch a fifth
wheel or gooseneck trailer. The center
high-mount stop lamp camera is not
meant as an alternative to the rear view
camera.

E231401

The side view camera, located in the
outside mirror, provide a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle. It aids
you while parking your vehicle, or when
parking with a trailer attached.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
E233763

The center high-mount stop lamp camera
view contains a dynamic guideline to help
you locate the center of your vehicle. This
view can only be accessed while in reverse
(R).

241

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Auxiliary Camera (If Equipped)
Note: The auxiliary camera works with
trailers up to 50 ft (15 m) in length.
E233727

Access the auxiliary camera view
by pressing the button on the
display screen when in reverse

(R).
The auxiliary camera system is a variant
of the rear view camera. It is designed to
display a rear view image from the back of
a trailer while reversing. The auxiliary
camera is not meant as an alternative to
the rear view camera.

242

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The indicator appears in the
information display.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
E71340

Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.

USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.

Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.

When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.

•
•

Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving
uphill.

•

Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.

Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press RES.

Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.

E191329

The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.

Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.

Switching Cruise Control On
Press ON.

243

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.

WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.

Do not use adaptive cruise control
with a snow plow blade installed.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.

Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.

The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.

Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with aftermarket trailer
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.

E183737

The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On

Adaptive cruise control may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

Press ON.

Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.

E144529

Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.

244

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.

E233874

Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.

Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster. A vehicle graphic
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.

E233874

5. A vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you.

The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.

245

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an
audible warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.

The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings

Setting the Gap Distance

Graphic display,
bars indicated
between vehicles

Dynamic behavior

1

Sport.

2

Normal.

3

Normal.

4

Comfort.

Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.

Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.

Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E183739

A

Gap decrease.

B

Gap increase.

When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
E144529

The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.

E233874

246

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Changing the Set Speed
•
•

•

Note: When towing with adaptive cruise
control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode and
Diesel Engine Brake.

Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Press and hold SET+ or SET- to
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when
you reach the desired speed.

Note: Tow/Haul mode increases the time
gaps and allows more distance for braking.
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.

The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.

Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.

Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.

Resuming the Set Speed

Detection Issues

Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.

WARNINGS
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.

Press RES. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

Automatic Cancellation
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
Automatic braking releases.

If the system malfunctions, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage

The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.

Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.

247

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.

System Not Available
Note: If you disable electronic stability
control, adaptive cruise control is not
available.
The system may not turn on if there is:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.

Blocked Sensor

E71621

Detection issues can occur:
A

When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.

B

With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.

C

E183741

Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.

There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.

248

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
Cause

Action

The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruction.

The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.

Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.

249

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If

System Settings

Equipped)

The system sensitivity and intensity can
be adjusted through the display screen.
See General Information (page 113). The
system remembers the last selection. You
do not need to readjust the setting each
time you turn on your vehicle.

WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.

Sensitivity: This setting allows you to
select where in the lane a warning is
provided. Increasing the sensitivity setting
moves the warning zones in closer to your
vehicle.

Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking at a
speed above 40 mph (64 km/h).
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
The Lane Keeping System automatically
detects and tracks the road lane markings
using a camera mounted behind the
interior review view mirror. The system
notifies you to stay in your lane when the
front camera detects an unintentional lane
change is likely to occur.

E165517

Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.

Normal

B

Increased

Note: The alert diagram illustrates general
zone coverage. It does not provide exact
zone parameters.

Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the mode
and intensity settings.

E173233

A

Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration. Increasing
the intensity causes a higher rate of haptic
feedback.

Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.

•
•
•

250

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

High
Normal
Low

Driving Aids
System Display

•
•
•

See Troubleshooting for additional
information.

E233874

When you switch on the system, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings appears in the display screen.

Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning on
the indicated side(s).

Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still display if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.

Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.

While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.

You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using your direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.

Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
•
•

Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain,
fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).

Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
Your turn indicator is active.

Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?

Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves

251

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?

Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows

BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the blind spot information
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system
is not a replacement for careful driving.
E227388

252

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages

The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It is only designed to alert
you to moving vehicles in the blind spot
zones.

E142442

The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
When the Blind Spot Information System
is alerting on a vehicle and the
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind
Spot Information System alert indicator
flashes as an increased warning level.

Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.

Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h).

The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.

For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).

System Sensor Blockage

Note: For automatic transmissions, the
Blind Spot Information System does not
function in reverse (R) or park (P).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except reverse (R).
E231384

253

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System
with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)

The system uses radar sensors that are
located inside the tail lamp on each side
of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow in
front of the sensors or driving in heavy rain
can cause system degradation. Also, other
types of obstructions in front of the sensor
can cause system degradation. This is
referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
appears in the display screen. The alert
indicators remain ON and the system no
longer provides any warnings. You can
clear the warning but the alert indicators
remain illuminated.

E225007

The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow is designed to aid you in
detecting vehicles that may have entered
the detection area zone (A). The detection
area is on both sides of your vehicle and
trailer, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to the end of your trailer.

A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
• After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.

When a trailer is attached and the
customer has set up a Blind Spot Trailer,
the Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow becomes active when driving
forward above 6 mph (10 km/h). See
Trailer Reversing Aids (page 274).
The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow can be turned off in the
instrument cluster. If the Blind Spot
Information System is turned off, then the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow automatically turns off.

Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot
Information System off. If your vehicle has
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer
tow module, it is recommended to turn the
Blind Spot Information System off
manually. Operating the Blind Spot
Information System without the Blind Spot
Trailer Tow package and a trailer attached
will cause poor system performance.

254

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).

Setting up a Blind Spot Trailer

Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement; just measure
that it is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.
•

E225008

A

Trailer length

B

Trailer width

C

Trailer hitch ball

The trailer length is the distance between
the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
trailer. The maximum length that the Blind
Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).

You can set-up any trailer to work with the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow through the instrument cluster menu.
See General Information (page 113).
While setting up a trailer, a sequence of
screens appear asking for trailer
information. The Blind Spot Information
System with Trailer Tow specific screens
are described below:
•

•

Select type of trailer screen Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.

If you do not set up a Blind Spot Trailer, a
warning appears in the instrument cluster
when a trailer is connected stating that the
system has been turned off due to a trailer
connect.

Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer
screen?

Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
cargo rack with electrical lighting, then the
length will be 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert
will remain on for trailers 3 ft (1 m) or less.

If no, the Blind Spot Information System
turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
•

Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)?

Note: Proper measurement and
measurement entry is required for Blind
Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
to function as designed.

If no, the Blind Spot Information System
turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
•

Enter length of trailer:

The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).
Toggling up or down using the menu
buttons will increase/decrease the
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select the
length so that the value is equal to or
within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured
length. For example, if the actual measured
length is 25 ft (7.6 m), then toggle the
length in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). When
the length has been entered, the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow setup
is saved.

The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow only supports conventional
trailers. If fifth wheel or gooseneck is
selected, the system automatically turns
off.
•

Trailer length measurement:

Trailer width measurement:

255

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
System Operation

Large box trailers may cause false alerts
to trigger when driving next to buildings or
near parking cars. A false alert may also
occur while making a 90-degree turn.

If you select a trailer in the display screen
prior to connecting the trailer, the system
will load that configuration and the
information cluster displays a message
when the trailer is connected. A second
message appears stating Cross Traffic
Alert has been turned off; the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow still
functions normally when driving forward.

Trailers that are 8.5 ft (2.6 m) wide at the
front and have a total length greater than
20 ft (6 m) may have delayed alerts from
passing vehicles when the vehicle is
passing at high speed.
A box trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft
(2.6 m) may cause early alerts when you
are over taking a vehicle.

If no trailer has been set up and a trailer is
connected, the instrument cluster provides
a message indicating a trailer is connected
followed by a message asking to select a
trailer from the existing list of trailers or to
add a trailer. In order for the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow to
function, an existing trailer must be
selected or a new trailer must be added. If
the request is ignored or if you exit the
screen, a message appears prompting you
that the system has been turned off due
to a trailer connect. This message may not
appear until your vehicle speed reaches
22 mph (35 km/h).

When towing a clam shell or V-Nose box
trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m),
delayed alerts on merging vehicles that are
traveling the same speed as your vehicle
may occur.

System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale illuminates
and a message appears in the display
screen. See Information Messages
(page 129).

The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow activates when driving forward
for that particular trailer set up. If the
ignition is cycled, the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
continues to function using the last trailer
selected.

Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the display
screen. See General Information (page
113). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you do not receive
alerts and the display screen shows a
system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.

Trailer Considerations
The Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow is designed to work with any
trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
or less and total length from the trailer
hitch ball to the rear of the trailer is 33 ft
(10.1 m) or less. Different trailers may
cause a slight change in performance as
outlined below.

Note: The Blind Spot Information System
remembers the last selected on or off
setting.
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
256

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If

Using the System

Equipped)

Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.

WARNING
Do not use the cross traffic alert
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before reversing
out of a parking space. The cross traffic
alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.

Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect
vehicles that approach the rear of your
vehicle with a speed up to 37 mph
(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Reversing slowly helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.

Note: When a trailer is detected, Cross
Traffic Alert automatically turns off.

In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.

Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).

E142440

Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.

257

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids

E142441

System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts

E231384

The system uses radar sensors that are
located in the tail lamp on each side of
your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow or
bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 252). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A Cross
Traffic Alert blocked message appears in
the display screen when the transmission
is shifted into reverse (R).

E142442

The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the display screen
indicating a vehicle is coming from the right
or left. Cross Traffic Alert works with the
reverse sensing system that sounds its own
series of tones. See Rear Parking Aid
(page 235).

258

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
System Limitations

System Errors

Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection and cause
false alerts.

If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message appears
in the display screen. See Information
Messages (page 129).

Switching the System Off and On

The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.

Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 113). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you do
not receive alerts and the display screen
shows a system off message.

False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no
factory equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross
Traffic Alert performance.

You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
the system can only be switched back on
at an authorized dealer.

Note: The system may illuminate the amber
alert indicator and sound the audible alert
during heavy rain even though no vehicle is
approaching from left or right.

To help prevent damage to the power
steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its
furthest turning points (until it stops)
for more than three seconds when the
engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low
power steering pump fluid level (below
the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation.
If excessive, check for low power
steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.

STEERING
Power Steering

There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.

259

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
•

•

The adaptive steering system continually
changes the steering ratio with changes to
vehicle speed, optimizing the steering
response in all conditions. The system also
changes when you switch on the
transmission tow/haul feature. When you
select the tow/haul button, the adaptive
steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity
to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds,
while maintaining the ease of parking and
maneuverability at low speeds.

Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused
by low power steering fluid. Check for
low power steering pump fluid level
before seeking service by your dealer.
Do not fill the power steering pump
reservoir above the MAX mark on the
reservoir, as this may result in leaks
from the reservoir.

If the power steering system breaks down
(or if the engine is turned off), you can
steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort.

Note: The adaptive steering system is
designed with a locking device. With the
lock engaged, the adaptive steering system
remains mechanically locked at a fixed
steering ratio. You may also notice a click
when you switch the vehicle on or after you
switch it off, as the lock disengages or
engages.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment

Note: If your vehicle loses electrical power
or detects a fault when you are driving, the
system automatically shuts down and you
retain normal steering function with a fixed
steering ratio. During this time it is possible
that the steering wheel may not be straight
when the vehicle is driving straight ahead.
In addition, the driver may notice that the
steering wheel angle required to steer the
vehicle may be different.

If any steering components are serviced or
replaced, install new fasteners (many are
coated with thread adhesive or have
prevailing torque features which may not
be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.

Note: During parking maneuvers, the
adaptive steering system balances the driver
work load for various steering wheel inputs
and vehicle loading conditions. Under
extreme operating conditions the system
locking device may engage. This strategy
prevents overheating and permanent
damage to the adaptive steering system.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.

Adaptive Steering (If Equipped)
Note: The adaptive steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously monitor
the system. If a fault is detected a message
displays in the information display. If a red
warning message displays, stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. The message
may clear if the fault is no longer present. If
an adaptive steering system warning
message appears each time you start your
vehicle, have the system checked as soon
as possible.

260

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)

Principle Of Operation (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.

E156131

When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a red warning light flashes
and a tone sounds.
The brake support system assists you in
reducing any collision speed by
pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
collision continues to increases after the
audio-visual warning, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if
the brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
brakes apply full stopping power.

The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace your judgment and the
need to maintain correct distance and
speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).

Using the Collision Warning System

Note: The collision warning system will be
unavailable if you disable the electronic
stability control. See Using Stability
Control (page 231).

The collision warning system’s brake
support reduces collision speed only
if you brake your vehicle before any
collision. As in any typical braking situation,
you must press your brake pedal.

WARNING

You can use your information display
control to adjust the collision warning
system's sensitivity or to turn the system
On or Off. Your vehicle will remember
these settings across key cycles. You may
change the collision warning system
sensitivity to any one of three possible
settings. See General Information (page
113).

E156130

The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.

261

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
Note: It is recommended that you turn the
collision warning system off if a snow plow
or similar object is installed in such a way
that it may block the radar sensor. Your
vehicle will remember the selected setting
across key cycles.

Blocked Sensors

Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page
113).

E183741

If a blocked sensor message appears in the
information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the collision warning
system will not work. Possible causes for
the blocked sensor message and corrective
actions are listed below.

Cause

Action

The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty
or obstructed

Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
obstruction

The surface of the radar sensor cover is
clean but the message remains in the
display

Wait a short time. The radar may take
several minutes to reset after you remove
the obstruction

Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air
interferes with the radar signals

The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates

Swirling water, snow or ice on the road
surface interferes with the radar signals

The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates

262

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Aids
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support only reduces collision speed
if you first apply your brakes. You
must brake as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
Small distance to vehicle ahead.
Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).

Damage to the front end of your vehicle
may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.

263

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT

Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:

Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.

E198719

Payload

PAYLOAD

E143816

264

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.

WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
265

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Load Carrying
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)

Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:

GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.

E198828

WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.

WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
label.

266

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Load Carrying
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNINGS
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower your
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to your vehicle,
personal injury or both.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.

Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
267

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Load Carrying
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have

the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
BED RAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
When sliding the ramp up or down,
take care not to get your fingers or
hands caught in the mechanism.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
Make sure that you correctly install
the ramp to the tailgate plate. Failure
to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.

268

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Load Carrying
WARNINGS
Do not step or sit on the ramp when
it is in the stowed position. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Only install the ramp within the
prescribed ramp angles. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Note: The ramp maximum capacity is
800 lb (363 kg).

E211150

4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the open position.
Note: You can use a smooth surface tool
to rotate the stops.

Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground
before usage.
Note: For loading and unloading
equipment, your ramp should be set
between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees
downward to avoid damage to the ramp
claw and tailgate plate.
Note: When using your vehicle for off-road
operation, remove the bed ramps from the
vehicle and store them in a safe location
away from your vehicle.

Using the Bed Ramp
1.

Remove the front and rear cables.
E194382

5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate
plate.

E194380

2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew
the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.

269

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Load Carrying

E194391

5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.
6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Note: Make sure you properly secure the
locking cable. If the locking cable is
unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise.

Installing the Ramp Holder
E194383

6. Pull the location pin outward and
extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.

Stowing the Bed Ramp
1.

Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.

E194387

1.

3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.

270

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Hook the top of the ramp holder over
the mounting plate and rotate the
ramp holder into position.

Load Carrying

E194388

2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards
into the installed position.
3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.

271

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Note: To prevent your trailer from
accumulating distance, and the
trailer information status appearing
when you restart your vehicle after
disconnecting your trailer, you must
deactivate your trailer. Using the
information display, go to the
Towing menu and then the Select
Trailer option. Select the No active
trailer option. See Information
Displays (page 113).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 317).
Your vehicle may have ability to
modify trailer towing features.
See General Information (page
113).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.

TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Do not exceed the lowest
rating capacity for your
vehicle or trailer hitch. Overloading
your vehicle or trailer hitch can
impair your vehicle stability and
handling. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Do not cut, drill, weld or
modify the trailer hitch.
Modifying the trailer hitch could
reduce the hitch rating.

272

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
264).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.

Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/

273

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Principle of Operation

TRAILER REVERSING AIDS

Trailer reverse guidance is a driver
assistance feature that helps take the
guesswork out of getting your trailer
positioned where you want it, quickly and
easily, when driving in reverse (R).

Trailer Reverse Guidance
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Each trailer you use with your vehicle has
to be setup once. Sticker placement is
extremely important and there are specific
placement rules.

Setting Up Trailer Reverse
Guidance
Note: Your vehicle saves the trailer
information when you enter it into the
system. A maximum of 10 trailers can be
added to the system.
Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer

Note: You must always be aware of the
vehicle and trailer combination and the
surrounding environment.

Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect
the electrical wiring harness. Check to
make sure that the wiring is working. See
Essential Towing Checks (page 286).

Note: The system does not detect or
prevent the vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.

Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.

Note: Keep in mind that the front end of
the vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.
Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement and system limits. It is critical to
take the key measurements correctly.
Incorrect measurements can result in the
improper function of the system up to and
including contact between the vehicle and
trailer.

E209759

Make sure that the trailer and truck are in
line with each other. You can do this by
putting the truck in drive (D) and pulling
straight forward.

Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.
Note: Some features associated with this
system do not work until you set it up.
E209760

274

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
8. A message appears in the information
display asking if you want to add trailer
reverse guidance. Select Yes to
continue.
9. Straighten out the trailer, if necessary.
10. The information display directs you
to the quick start guide for how to
proceed. The steps are also shown
here.

Step 2: Follow the Information Display
Prompts
1.

Use the steering wheel controls to
navigate to the towing menu.
2. Select Trailer Setup from the available
options.
3. Select Add a Trailer and press OK to
confirm.
4. The system asks you to name the
trailer. Use the steering wheel controls
to choose from the alphanumeric
characters. Press the right arrow to
advance to the next character. When
you finish naming the trailer, press OK
to confirm.
5. Select the type of brake system for
your trailer. Select DEFAULT if your
trailer has electric, surge or no brakes.
Press OK to select and advance to the
next screen
Note: The default option is low. This is
recommended for most trailers. If the
trailer's brakes require more initial voltage,
or if you prefer more aggressive braking, then
select the other options as required.

Step 3: Placing the Target
Place the entire sticker in the gray zone on
the trailer outlined in the diagram. The
sticker is in the back cover pocket of the
quick start guide.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
following procedure.
Note: Make sure nothing obstructs the rear
view cameras view of the sticker. For
example, items such as a jack handle or
wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
clean horizontal surface. For best results
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).

6. The system asks you to select your
trailer type. You can use the system
with conventional, fifth wheel and
goose neck trailers. For fifth wheel and
goose neck trailers, set up and sticker
placement are not required, however
some of the features do not operate
automatically with these trailer types.
Use the steering wheel controls to
select your trailer type.
Note: You can still manually control the
camera views on the touchscreen to help
you reverse goose neck and fifth wheel
trailers.
7.

Note: Do not move stickers after they are
placed. Do not re-use any stickers if
removed.

E224482

If your vehicle includes a blind spot
information system, the system
prompts you to setup the trailer blind
spot feature. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 252).

275

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Use the supplied measurement card, a
tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area where to attach the sticker. The
sticker is supplied in the back cover pocket
of your quick start guide. Make sure the
entire sticker is within the gray zone
between the two arcs or distance markers
on the diagram, and is also visible in the
rear view camera display. It should be
between 7–20 in (17–51 cm) from the
trailer ball hitch.
Once you have found the correct location,
place the sticker.
Step 4: Take Measurements

E231167

After you place the sticker on the trailer
you must take some measurements.

Distance A

Note: You must take accurate
measurements for the system to operate
properly.

The horizontal distance from the license
plate to the center of the ball hitch on the
trailer.

Note: Round measurement figures to the
nearest half inch.

Distance B
The horizontal distance from the center of
the ball hitch to the center of the sticker.

Note: Round upward if the measured length
is a quarter inch or greater. Round
downward if the measure length is less than
a quarter inch. For example 12.25 in
(31.11 cm) would be rounded up to 12.50 in
(31.75 cm). 12.13 in (30.8 cm) would be
rounded down to 12.00 in (30.48 cm).

Distance C
The distance from the rear view camera to
the center of the sticker.
Distance D

Note: Use consistent metric or imperial
units as required by your country or vehicle.

The distance from the tailgate to the
center of the trailer axle (single axle
trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers
with dual axles or more).

The measurement card requires you to
record four key distances (A, B, C, D).
Record the trailer name for these
measurements.

276

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the
Information Display

Note: For best results, do not calibrate the
system at night.

Using the measurements you recorded,
enter the required data into the system.
Follow the on screen prompts to enter
each of the measurements taken in step
4. Use the up and down arrows to increase
or decrease the numbers as necessary.
Press OK to confirm each measurement.
Once you add the last measurement, the
information display shows all of the
entered measurements. You can choose
to confirm or change the measurements.

Using Trailer Reverse Guidance
1.

Shift into reverse (R). Press the rear
camera button to expand the menu.
2. Press the trailer icon.
3. Select the applicable trailer in the
information display.
4. When in trailer reverse guidance mode,
you can see the camera view on the
side your trailer is moving, or both sides
when the trailer is straight behind you.
When the views change with the trailer
direction, it is called auto mode. For
example, if you turn the trailer to the
right, you see the right side of your
vehicle and trailer. You can switch this
view manually at any time by using the
arrow keys. To return to auto mode,
press the auto button.
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.

Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the rear view camera display to see
if the system identifies the sticker. The
system marks the sticker with a red circle.
Confirm that the red circle shows over the
sticker image in the rear view camera
display.
Note: If the system cannot locate the
sticker, try cleaning the camera lens. Make
sure the sticker is within the zone as
indicated in step 3.

Use the view that helps you the most when
reversing your vehicle and trailer.
Normal rear view camera view.
Use this feature when you want
to see your trailer hitch or what
is directly behind your vehicle.

The information display shows a
confirmation message when you
successfully confirm the target.

E263194

Calibrating the System

Straight back-up mode. Use this
feature when you want to keep
E224484
your trailer completely in line
with your truck. In this mode, a steering
wheel graphic shows you which way to turn
your steering wheel to keep your trailer
straight.

To complete setup, drive your vehicle
straight forward between 4–24 mph
(6–39 km/h), as directed by the
information display.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight
during the calibration process. If the steering
wheel is in a turned position, the calibration
pauses. The information display prompts
you to drive straight forward to complete
the calibration.

Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle
into drive (D), pull forward and straighten
out the vehicle and trailer before engaging
straight back-up mode.

The information display shows a message
during calibration and after calibration is
complete

Left and right arrows let you see other
views regardless of your trailer angle. Use
them to switch views manually.

277

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Note: If you're using a fifth wheel or goose
neck trailer, or if you have not set up the
trailer reverse guidance system, auto view
is not available.

When you turn the steering wheel, a small
representation shows you two zones to
warn you of a possible jackknife condition.
The view shows your truck and trailer
position and provides visual feedback to
help avoid a jackknife condition entirely.

To change your view, use the arrows. You
can see the following views:
•
•
•
•
•

The yellow zone warns you of a potential
jackknife position. When you enter into this
zone, it is recommended to put your vehicle
back into drive (D) and pull forward.
Moving forward helps put the truck and
trailer back into an in-line position.

Full driver.
Partial driver.
50/50.
Partial passenger.
Full passenger.

E224485

The red zone indicates that you need to
put the truck into drive (D) and pull
forward immediately.

Zoom. Use this feature to zoom
in the camera view.

Troubleshooting

Return. Ths feature takes you
back to the 360-degree camera
E224486
system and out of the trailer
reverse guidance feature.

E224487

Note: The system requires a clear view of
the sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for
the system to operate correctly.

Auto. Ths feature returns you to
auto view.

Setup

In addition to multiple view options, your
touchscreen adds some features to give
you more information. For example, after
setting up a conventional trailer, the
display shows a small top-view
representation of your truck and trailer.

The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. However, there are
some trailers that do not have a proper
surface and location to mount the sticker.
These trailers are not supported. Attempts
to place the sticker on a surface that does
not meet the sticker placement
requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup
instruction, or entering inaccurate
measurements to proceed through setup
can result in improper system function.

This representation shows two,
different-colored lines: A black line shows
you where your trailer is in relation to your
vehicle. A white line gives you a projection
of where your trailer may go based on your
current steering wheel position

Accurate measurements are critical to
correct system function. If you need to
check measurements or change them, you
can access them through the trailer menus
in the information display. Choose the
option to change the sticker from the
change trailer settings menu. It is not
necessary to remove the sticker if you are
just reviewing or changing measurements.

Note: When you move the steering wheel,
the white line indicates where the trailer
may go based on your steering wheel input.
When you turn your steering wheel to the
left, the trailer moves to the right. When you
turn your steering wheel to the right, the
trailer moves to the left.

278

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
The following menu warnings or difficulties
may occur during setup. Tips to resolve
them are listed below.

Measurement C has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure you follow the sticker
placement instructions in step 3 of the
setup. Stickers placed outside the
allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function. If you have
met all the criteria for sticker
placement and you see this message,
the sticker is either too far below or too
close to the camera to properly
recognize the sticker. In order for the
system to correctly operate, the sticker
height must be lowered if you receive
the minimum warning or the sticker
height must be raised if you receive the
maximum warning.
• Only one sticker can be placed on
the trailer for correct system
function. The previous sticker must
be removed or covered so only one
sticker is visible to the camera.
• Measurement B and C must be
measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.

Measurement A has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a license plate to
hitch ball center measurement of
9–16 in (229–406 mm) when installed.
Do not attempt to use drawbars that
have a length outside this range as
system performance degrades and
could cause improper system function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from license plate and the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and makes
it inaccurate. Inaccurate
measurements degrade system
performance and could cause improper
system function. See step 4 of the
setup instruction to review the
measurement instructions.
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure you follow the sticker
placement instruction in step 3 of the
setup. Stickers placed outside the
allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from center of sticker to the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and
causes an inaccurate value to be
entered into the system. See step 4 of
the setup for additional measurement
instructions.

Measurement D has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from tailgate to the center of the single
axle or the center of all the axles on the
trailer. See step 4 of the setup for
additional measurement instructions.
The system does not support trailer
lengths outside the range allowed by
the information display.

279

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
The system is not available:
• The system relies on many
sub-systems in your vehicle to correctly
operate. If those sub-systems are not
correctly operating, the system may
not be available.
• Low battery voltage is one
condition which prevents the
system from operating. Please
make sure the battery is correctly
charged if the system is not
available.
• You may need to drive your vehicle
straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) before the system is
available again.
• If the message still displays, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.

System is circling something beside the
sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and
the sticker is clearly visible in the
camera image. Clean the camera and
sticker if necessary.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate sticker
measurements degrade the system's
ability to locate the sticker. Verify the
measurements entered into the system
are accurate.
• Remove the incorrectly circled label or
decal if possible.
• If you cannot resolve the issue, a new
sticker location should be tried. The
new sticker location must meet the
requirements noted in step 3 of the
setup instructions. Only one sticker can
be placed on the trailer for correct
system function. The previous sticker
must be removed or covered so only
one sticker is visible to the camera.

Sticker lost:
• Check for the following if you receive
the lost sticker message when using
the system.
• Stop your vehicle as soon as the
message displays.
• Make sure the sticker is visible in
the rear view camera image.
• Clean the sticker and camera to
make sure they are unobstructed.
• Remove any items that may be
blocking the view of the sticker.
Depending on your trailer
configuration and any equipment
mounted to your trailer, it is
possible for the sticker to be
blocked from the view of the
camera as it rotates on the hitch
ball, but not be blocked during
setup. Remove the obstruction if
possible. It may be necessary to

Calibration
The system monitors various vehicle
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
driven straight and the trailer straight
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or
trailer movement pauses the calibration.
For best results:
• Use a long, straight and smooth road
when attempting to calibrate.
• Drive straight forward.
• Drive between 4–24 mph
(6–39 km/h).
System Operation
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.

280

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing

•

•

•

remove the sticker from its current
location if the obstruction cannot
be cleared. Place a new sticker that
is visible to the camera in all
positions of the trailer behind your
vehicle.
You can change your sticker
location by going into the trailer
menu, selecting trailer options,
selecting change trailer settings
and then selecting the change
sticker option. The previous sticker
must be removed. ONLY ONE
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED
ON THE TRAILER FOR CORRECT
SYSTEM FUNCTION.
The camera system uses the
entered measurements to help
locate the sticker. Inaccurate
measurements reduce the system’s
ability to locate the sticker. Check
the measurements entered into the
system are correct. Refer to the
step 4 of trailer reverse guidance
setup for instructions on
measurements.
You can change your measurement
by going into the trailer menu,
selecting trailer options, selecting
change trailer setting and then
selecting the change sticker option.
Disregard the prompt to remove
this sticker and continue to the next
step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current
sticker location.

slowly turning the wheel until the trailer
is following your desired path and then
holding the wheel in that position. If
you would like to recalibrate the
system for straight backing, you can do
so with the following procedure.
• Go into the trailer menu, select
trailer options, select change trailer
setting and then select the change
sticker option. Your saved
measurements show. Do not
change them, but continue to
confirm measurements. Once you
confirm the measurements, the
system then prompts you to
perform the calibration procedure.
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
the trailer is chosen from the selection
menu. Using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole, on drawbars with more
than one pin hole, when connecting the
drawbar to your vehicle affects the trailer
measurements. Take the measurements
again and update if required.

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)

WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.

System does not backup straight:
• Factors such as the drawbar
connection to the hitch receiver, road
camber, road grade and compliance in
the trailer suspension can influence
how straight the system is able to
reverse your trailer when the wheel is
not turned. You can compensate for
the trailer drifting to the right or left by

Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.

281

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer2 frontal2 area.
Do not exceed 60 ft (5.6 m ) trailer
frontal area for conventional
2
trailers. Do not exceed 75 ft (6.9
2
m ) trailer frontal area for fifth
wheel and gooseneck trailers.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight
calculated using the formula
following the chart.

Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 264).

RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
WARNING
You must use the heavy-duty
drawbar pin supplied with
your vehicle when using the
heavy-duty hitch. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
Note: Vehicles with a heavy-duty
hitch must use the drawbar pin
stamped 21,000 LBS. You can
obtain a replacement drawbar pin
at your authorized dealer.

282

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing

Pickup and box delete
Rear axle ratio

Maximum
GCWR

3.73

19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)

4.30

22,000 lb
(9,979 kg)

6.7L diesel

3.31, 3.55

23,500 lb
(10,660 kg)

1

3.31, 3.55

25,700 lb
(11,657 kg)

3.73

19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)

4.30

23,000 lb
(10,433 kg)

3.31, 3.55

28,700 lb
(13,018 kg)

3.73

20,000 lb
(9,072 kg)

4.30

23,500 lb
(10,660 kg)

3.55

36,000 lb
(16,329 kg)

4.10

40,000 lb
(18,144 kg)

4.30

42,800 lb
(19,414 kg)

Vehicle

Engine

6.2L gas
F-250

6.7L diesel

6.2L gas

F-350 single
rear wheel

6.7L diesel

6.2L gas
F-350 dual rear
wheel
6.7L diesel

F-450
1 Trailer

6.7L diesel

Tow Package.

283

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing

Chassis cab
Vehicle

F-350 single
rear wheel

Engine

Rear axle
ratio

Maximum
GCWR

3.73

19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)

4.30

23,000 lb
(10,433 kg)

3.73

26,500 lb
(12,020 kg)

3.73

20,000 lb
(9,072 kg)

4.30

23,500 lb
(10,660 kg)

3.73

31,000 lb
(14,062 kg)

4.10

32,000 lb
(14,515 kg)

4.88

28,000 lb
(12,701 kg)

4.10

32,000 lb
(14,515 kg)

4.30

34,500 lb
1
(15,649 kg)

4.88

28,000 lb
(12,701 kg)

4.10

32,000 lb
(14,515 kg)

4.30

35,000 lb
(15,876 kg)

6.2L gas

6.7L diesel

6.2L gas
F-350 dual rear
wheel
6.7L diesel
6.8L gas
F-450 dual rear
wheel

6.7L diesel

6.8L gas
F-550 dual rear
wheel (17500/
18000 lb
GVWR)

6.7L diesel

284

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Chassis cab
Vehicle

F-550 dual rear
wheel (19000/
19500 lb
GVWR)
1 Requires

Engine

Rear axle
ratio

Maximum
GCWR

6.8L gas

4.88

28,000 lb
(12,701 kg)

4.88

32,000 lb
(14,515 kg)

4.88

40,000 lb
1
(18,144 kg)

6.7L diesel

optional GCWR Package.
•

Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
For additional information on
trailer weights, reference the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available
at your authorized dealer, or
online.

Calculating the Maximum
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
previous chart.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, such as
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger(s) weight.

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/

285

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Trailer Towing Connector

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum vertical
load on the tow ball. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.

E163167

When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
Color

Function

Yellow

Left turn signal and stop lamp

White

Ground (-)

Blue

Electric brakes

Green

Right turn signal and stop
lamp

Vehicles with a diesel engine have an
engine braking feature. See General
Information (page 225).

Orange

Battery (+)

Brown

Running lights

Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.

Grey

Reverse lights

See Load Limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load.

Some vehicles will have the ability to
modify trailer towing features. See
General Information (page 113).

286

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
factory brake controller, the Battery (+)
Orange wire is powered when you start the
engine and you apply the brakes at least
once when a trailer with brake lamps is
connected. If your vehicle is not equipped
with a factory brake controller, relays control
the system and it becomes active when you
power on your vehicle.

A

B C

D

E

Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear
View Camera System
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Use the centerline (B) guideline to assist
you in setting your steering wheel properly
to help align the trailer hitch and tongue.

F
E142436

A

Active guidelines.

B

Centerline.

C

Fixed guideline: Green zone.

D

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone.

E

Fixed guideline: Red zone.

F

Rear bumper.

Fixed guidelines are always shown in the
display, but the active guidelines only
display when the steering wheel is turned.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.

287

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Installing a 3 Inch Drawbar with 3/4
Inch Pin Hole

The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Refer to the Rear View Camera section for
additional information. See Rear View
Camera (page 236).

Hitches
Note: On pick-up trucks, the trailer hitch
provided on this vehicle enhances crash
protection for the fuel system. Do not
remove!
Note: Do not cut, drill, weld or modify trailer
hitches. Modifying trailer hitches can reduce
hitch rating.

E247903

The pin sleeve should be inserted in the
3/4 inch pin hole of the 3 inch drawbar.

Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% for conventional towing or
15-25% for fifth wheel towing of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Hitch Components (If Equipped)
The following components are required.
Some are provided in certain vehicles.
•

•

•

A trailer hitch with a 3 inch receiver and
5/8 inch hitch pin rated to tow up to
21,000 lb (9,525 kg).
A hitch pin sleeve stored in the glove
box to be used when mounting the 3
inch drawbar.
A cotter pin to help keep the hitch pin
in place.

E247902

Remove reducers before inserting the 3
inch drawbar. Insert the drawbar into hitch
receiver.

288

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.

E247909

Put the 5/8 inch hitch pin through pin hole.
Place the cotter pin around the neck of
hitch pin.

Fifth-wheel Trailer Hitch (If Equipped)

Weight-distributing Hitches

Note: The mounting pads in the bed are
specifically designed for certain fifth-wheel
trailer hitches and gooseneck ball hitches.
Do not use these mounting pads for other
purposes.

WARNING
Do not adjust the spring bars so that
your vehicle's rear bumper is higher
than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.

Note: Contact an authorized dealer to
purchase gooseneck and fifth-wheel hitches
that are compatible with your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
fifth-wheel prep package. This package
enables your vehicle to accept certain
fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck
ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch
attaches to the four mounting pads in the
pick-up bed. An optional 7-pin trailer wiring
connector may be in the bed as well. The
gooseneck ball hitch is a separate
mounting pad from the fifth-wheel hitch,
located in the center of the bed.

When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1.

Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.

289

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Shorter pick-up boxes, such as the 6½-foot
box on the F-250 and F-350, provide less
clearance between the cab and the
fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailer
compared to longer box pick-ups, such as
an 8-foot box on the F-250 or F-350. When
selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it is
critical to check that this combination
provides clearance between the front of
the trailer and tow vehicle for turns up to
90 degrees. Failure to follow this
recommendation could result in the trailer
contacting the cab of the tow vehicle
during tight turns that are typical during
low-speed parking and turning maneuvers.
This contact could result in damage to the
trailer and tow vehicle.

Note: If you install the hook with the latch
facing toward the rear of your vehicle, you
may not be able to fully close the safety
chain hook latch. If this occurs, install the
hook with the latch facing toward the front
of your vehicle.

Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.

Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.

The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.

Install trailer safety chains to the trailer
hitch as recommended by the
manufacturer. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.

Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.

Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)

WARNINGS
The anti-lock brake system does not
control the trailer brakes.
Use the integrated trailer brake
controller to properly adjust the
trailer brakes and check all
connections before towing a trailer. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.

E265060

If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
make sure the latch is fully closed.

290

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Note: The integrated Ford brake controller
is compatible with trailers equipped with
electric-actuated drum brakes and
electric-over hydraulic brake systems.

A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). Pressing and holding a button
raises or lowers the setting continuously.
The gain setting displays in the message
center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.

Note: The integrated Ford brake controller
does not control hydraulic surge-style
brakes.

B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to switch on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.

E183395

•

When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.

Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever lights both the trailer brake lamps
and your vehicle brake lamps.

Trailer brake control messages appear in
the information display as follows:
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER:
Shows the current gain setting.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=/ / / /
/ /: Displays when braking. The bars
indicate the amount of power going to
the trailer brakes.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays
when the system senses a correct
trailer wiring connection.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays
when the system senses a trailer
disconnection.

You can adjust the amount of initial trailer
brake output by selecting one of three
settings through the message center.
Ford has tested the trailer brake controller
to be compatible with several major
brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brakes. Contact an authorized dealer for
information on which brands you can use.
The controller user interface consists of
the following:

Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
Controller Effort
Choose either the electric option for trailers
with electromagnetic drum brakes, or the
electric over hydraulic option for trailers
with these brake systems.

291

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Trailer Brake Effort Setting

4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.

The trailer brake controller allows the user
to customize how aggressively the trailer
brakes engage. The default value is the low
setting and is the recommended setting
for most trailers. If your trailer's brakes
require more initial voltage, or if you prefer
more aggressive trailer braking, then select
either the medium or the high setting.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
Controller Mode
Choose the low, medium or high setting
for the required initial trailer brake output.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).

Information Display Warning Messages

The gain setting adjusts the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.

Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.

The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.

TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT
Displays in response to faults sensed by
the trailer brake controller, accompanied
by a single tone. If this message appears,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair. The
controller may still function, but with
degraded performance.

1.

Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
confirmation message appears in the
information display.

WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
Displays when there is a short circuit on
the electric brake output wire.
If this message displays, with no trailer
connected, the problem is with your vehicle
wiring or trailer brake controller. Contact
an authorized dealer.

292

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
If the message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.

•

•

Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
•
•

•

•

•

•

Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller.
Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather, trailer
or vehicle loading conditions change
from when the gain was initially set.
Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only active
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.

The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes.
When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down.

Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.

Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.

293

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
When Towing a Trailer
•

•

•
•

•

•

•

•

•

Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
If your vehicle is equipped with
Adaptive Steering and you have
enabled Tow/Haul, the Adaptive
Steering system adjusts the steering
response to match your vehicle’s load.
The system reduces vehicle sensitivity
to steering inputs at higher vehicle
speeds while it maintains the ease of
parking and maneuverability at low
speeds.

•

•

•

If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
filled with it).
Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:

1.

Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
"temporary" spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type
(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
different manufacturer than the road tires
on your vehicle. Consult information on the
tire label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.

Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after you remove the trailer from the water.

294

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Emergency Towing

When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.

If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
208).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.

WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS

Recreational Towing

WARNING

Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 146).

If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.

Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We have
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels
on the ground, as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. It is recommended to
tow your vehicle with all four (4) wheels
off the ground, such as when using a
car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you cannot
tow your vehicle.

295

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
Note: If you do not see the message in the
display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.

Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped
with a Manual-shift Transfer Case
1. Put the transmission in neutral (N).
2. Put the transfer case in neutral (N).
3. Put the hub locks in the FREE position.
Always make sure that both hub locks
are set to the same position.

Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
This is normal.
6. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
and turn the ignition as far as it will go
toward the off position (it will not turn
fully off when the transmission is in
neutral). If your vehicle has an ignition
key, you must leave the key in the
ignition while towing. To lock and
unlock your vehicle, use the keyless
entry keypad or extra set of keys. If your
vehicle has intelligent access, press the
engine START/STOP button once
without pressing the brake pedal. You
do not need to leave your keys in the
vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
vehicle as you normally do.
7. Release the brake pedal.

Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped
with an Electronic-shift Transfer Case
Only tow a four-wheel drive vehicle that
has an electronic-shift transfer case with
all wheels on the ground. To do this, place
the transfer case in its neutral position and
engage the four-wheel-down towing
feature.
Perform the steps in the following section
after positioning your vehicle behind the
tow vehicle and properly securing them
together.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.

WARNINGS
Do not disconnect the battery during
recreational towing. It prevents the
transfer case from shifting properly
and may cause the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in park (P).

Four-wheel-down Towing
1.

Put the ignition in the on position, but
do not start the engine. If your vehicle
has an ignition key, turn the key to on.
If your vehicle has intelligent access,
press the engine START/STOP button
once without pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to
2H.
4. Shift the transmission to neutral (N).
5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch
from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five
times within seven seconds.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows a message
indicating that your vehicle is safe to tow
with all wheels on the ground.

Shifting the transfer case to its
neutral position for recreational
towing may cause the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in park (P). It
may injure the driver and others. Make sure
you press the foot brake and the vehicle is
in a secure, safe position when you shift to
neutral (N).
Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position while towing with all four
wheels on the ground will damage vehicle
components.

296

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Towing
7.

Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver's door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position and verifying a
message displays in the cluster.

If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of neutral (N),
set the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.

Resolving the Shift Delay Issue

To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position:

If the instrument cluster displays a shift
delay message, See Information
Messages (page 129). You need to
perform the following steps:

1.

With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in
the on position, but do not start the
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition
key, switch the key to on. If your vehicle
has intelligent access, press the engine
START/STOP button once without
pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission out of neutral
(N) and into any other gear.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the 2H
indicator light illuminates and a
confirmation message displays in the
instrument cluster.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N),
and then start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission to drive (D) and let the
vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
4. When the issue is resolved, the
instrument cluster displays a message
stating neutral tow is disabled.

Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
Note: If a message displays in the
instrument cluster stating there is a shift
delay, transfer case gear tooth blockage
may be present. See Resolving the Shift
Delay Issue after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake and disconnect
the vehicle from the tow vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the
engine and shift the transmission to
drive (D) to make sure the transfer
case is out of neutral (N).

297

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN

•

You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.

•
•

Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
Use the recommended engine oil.
Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.

Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.

Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 mi
(1,600 km) before towing a trailer. Make
sure you use the specified engine oil. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
427).
Do not add friction modifier compounds
or special break-in oils during the first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation.
These additives may prevent piston ring
seating.

ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).

Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.

298

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Hints
•

•

•

•

•

Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
Close the windows for high-speed
driving.

When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•
•
•
•

Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.

Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.

Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.

Secure the floor mat to both
retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.

Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.

Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

E176913

299

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Hints
•

•

E142666

To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.

SNOWPLOWING
Ford recommends that the Super Duty
F-Series used for snow removal include
the snowplow package option.

•

Installing the Snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
snowplow section, found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical
installation affects the following:

•

•

300

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Certification to government safety laws
such as occupant protection and airbag
deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
for an Alterer’s Label on the vehicle
from the snowplow installer certifying
that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity
(TARC) is on the lower right side of the
vehicle’s Safety Compliance
Certification Label. This applies to
Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) GVWR or less. This is the
weight of permanently-attached
auxiliary equipment, such as snowplow
frame-mounting hardware, that can
be added to the vehicle and satisfy
Ford compliance certification to
FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may
require the auxiliary equipment installer
additional safety certification
responsibility. The Front Accessory
Reserve Capacity (FARC) is for
customer convenience.
Rear ballast weight behind the rear
axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
front-to-rear weight balance for proper
braking and steering.
Front wheel toe may require
re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
the Ford Workshop Manual.
Headlight aim may require
re-adjustment.

Driving Hints
•

•

Snowplowing with your Airbag
Equipped Vehicle

The tire air pressures recommended
for general driving are on the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label. The
maximum cold inflation pressure for
the tire and associated load rating is
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure
may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the
additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
Federal and some local regulations
require additional exterior lamps for
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult
your authorized dealer for additional
information.

WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) or its fuses.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Additional equipment for example
snowplow equipment may affect the
performance of the airbag sensors
increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to
the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelt, even
when provided with an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS).

Operating the Vehicle with the
Snowplow Attached
Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow
removal until you have driven at least
500 mi (800 km).
Ford recommends vehicle speed does not
exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when
snowplowing.

Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and
passenger airbag supplemental restraint
system. The supplemental restraint system
will activate in certain frontal and offset
frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient frontal deceleration.

The attached snowplow blade restricts
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the
engine to run at a higher temperature:
Attention to engine temperature is
especially important when outside
temperatures are above freezing. Angle
the blade to maximize airflow to the
radiator and monitor engine temperature
to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.

Careless or high speed driving while
plowing snow that results in sufficient
vehicle decelerations can deploy the
airbags. Such driving also increases the risk
of accidents.
Never remove or defeat the tripping
mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle
and the snow removal equipment as well
as possible airbag deployment.

Follow the severe duty schedule in your
Scheduled Maintenance information for
engine oil and transmission fluid change
intervals.

Engine temperature while plowing
When driving with a plow, your engine may
run at a higher temperature than normal
because the attached snowplow blade will
restrict airflow to the radiator.

301

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Driving Hints
•

•

If you are driving more than 15 mi
(24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either
full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you will not
need to worry about blade position to
provide maximum airflow.

Transmission operation while
plowing
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
•

•

•

Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)
when plowing in small areas at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)
when plowing larger areas or light snow
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.

302

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
•

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.

•

Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.

Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.

303

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance

The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.

To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.

•
•

Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
Press the button again to switch them
off.

FUEL SHUTOFF

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance

WARNING

Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.

If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the fuel system checked.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.

In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.

Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.

Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.

The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.

HAZARD FLASHERS

If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.

304

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

Preparing Your Vehicle

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.

Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.

Connecting the Jumper Cables

WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.

Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.

Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.

Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.

305

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
Jump Starting
1.

Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.

1

3

4

Removing the Jumper Cables

2

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.

4

E142664

1.

Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.

2

1

3
E142665

1.

306

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.

Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.

E143886

If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.

WARNINGS
Block the wheels to help prevent the
vehicle from moving.
Unexpected and possibly sudden
vehicle movement may occur if you
do not take these precautions.

We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.

307

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. However, it is acceptable to
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle
configuration, you perform the following
before towing:

WARNINGS
Always slowly remove the slack from
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can cause
the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.

•

Never link two straps together with
a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.

•

If your vehicle has a manual-shift
transfer case, make sure the front
wheel hub locks are in the FREE
position before towing.
If your vehicle has an electronic
shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make
sure you switch the four-wheel drive
control to the 2H position before
towing.

Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.

Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly
four-wheel drive vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground without disengaging
the front hubs may cause damage to the
automatic transmission.

Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.

Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or
an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel
drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or
faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause
damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow a
dual rear wheel vehicle requires removing
an outer rear wheel before towing.

TOWING POINTS
WARNINGS
Using recovery hooks is dangerous
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery
safety practices. Improper use of recovery
hooks may cause hook failure or separation
from the vehicle and could result in serious
injury or death.

308

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
•

•

Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.

309

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED

Website

www.owner.ford.com

Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.

These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.

Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.

In Canada:

A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.

Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8

Away From Home

Telephone

If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website

www.ford.ca

In the United States:

Twitter

Mailing address

@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)

Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126

Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:

Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)

1.

Additional information and resources are
available online:

310

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.

Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.

In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:

In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.

1.

Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126

311

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.

THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.

You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.

BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.

312

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)

GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA

For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.

The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.

The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:

CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:

313

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Customer Assistance

Customer Relationship Center

Phone

Fax

E-mail

Asia Pacific

N/A

N/A

apemcrc@ford.com

Caribbean and
Central America

+1 313 594 4857

-

expcac@ford.com

971 4 3327 266

menacac@ford.com

Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
Middle East

UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078

Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands

+1-800-841-3673

N/A

prcac@ford.com

Sub-Saharan Africa

+1-313-594-4857

N/A

ssacrc@ford.com

South Korea

+82-02-1600-6003

N/A

infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com

If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.

Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.

If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.

To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:

ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE

HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

314

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.

315

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Customer Assistance

Transport Canada Contact Information

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English)

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French)

Phone

1–800–333–0510

Ford of Canada Contact Information

Website

www.ford.ca

Phone

1–800–565-3673

316

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.

If the battery has been disconnected and
reconnected, some features will need to
be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 353).

To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.

E252492

317

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses

Fuse or Relay
Number

1
2
3

4

5

Fuse Rating

1

Powertrain control module.

1

Emissions - malfunction indicator lamp.

20A
20A

1

20A

20A

Protected Components

1

1

15A

Cooling fan.
A/C compressor.
Engine brake.
Noise suppression cap.
Mass air flow sensor.
Emissions.
Glow plugs.
Urea.
Compressed natural gas fuel control
module.
Fuel sensor.

6

—

Not used.

7

—

Not used.

8

—

Not used.

9

—

Not used.

10
11
12

1

15A
—

40A
—

14

—

15
16

Compressed natural gas relay.
2

13

Heated exterior mirrors.

Heated rear window.
Not used.
Powertrain control module relay.

1

Horn.

1

A/C clutch relay power.

20A
10A

17

—

Rear heated window and heated mirrors
relay.

18

—

Trailer park lamp relay.

19

—

Not used.

318

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Rating

Protected Components

20

—

Supplemental air heater bank #1 relay.

21

—

Not used.

22

—

Not used.

23

—

Not used.

24

—

Cooling fan relay.
Supplemental air heater bank #3 relay.

25

—

Glow plug module power relay.

26

—

Not used.

27

2

30A

28

—

29

—

30
31
32
33

34

Not used.
Run-start relay.
1

10A
5A

Trailer tow battery charge relay (if
equipped).

Adaptive cruise control.
Run-start.

1

5A

4x4 module.

Anti-lock brake system module.
Run-start.

1

1

10A

1

10A

Powertrain control module - ignition status
power run.
Run-start.
Engine control module.
Transmission control module.
Blind spot information system.
Run-start.
Front camera.
Rear camera.

35

—

Not used.

36

—

Blower motor relay.

37

—

Trailer tow battery charge relay (only on
non-trailer brake controller vehicles).

38

—

A/C compressor clutch relay.

319

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Rating

39

—

Horn relay.

40

—

Supplemental air heater bank #2 relay.

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

25A

Protected Components

2

Glow plugs.

2

Trailer tow lighting module (if equipped).

2

Front blower motor.

40A
40A

3

50A

Voltage quality.
Body control module power.

3

Active front steering.

3

Supplemental air heater bank #2.

60A
50A

3

50A

Cooling fan.
Supplemental air heater bank #3.

3

Body control module run power 1 bus.

3

Inverter.

3

Body control module run power 2 bus.

3

Body control module B+ feed.

3

Anti-lock brake system pump.

3

Supplemental air heater bank #1.

3

Trailer brake control module.

3

Climate controlled seat module.

3

Auxiliary lighting module.

2

Power running boards.

50A

60A
50A

60A
60A
50A
30A
30A

40A
30A

2

30A

Compressed natural gas fuel control
module relay.

320

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

Fuse Rating

2

30A
—

2

20A

20A

20A

78

2

Trailer tow lighting module (if equipped).

2

Auxiliary power point #3 (center console).

2

Passenger power seat.

2

2

2

4x4 module.
Auxiliary power point #5 (rear center
console).

Trailer tow left hand/right hand stop/turn
(if equipped, not present with trailer brake
controller).
Not used.
Not used.

2

30A
—

Fuel pump.
Not used.

2

30A
—

Auxiliary power point #4 (USB charger, rear
center console).

Not used.

30A

—

77

Auxiliary power point #2.

—

74

76

2

2

20A

Auxiliary power point #1 (instrument
panel).
Starter motor.

30A
20A

Driver power seat.

2

30A

—

75

2

30A

73

Anti-lock brake system valve.
Not used.

30A

25A

Protected Components

Wiper motor.
Not used.

321

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

79
80
81
82
83
84

Fuse Rating

Protected Components

2

Power sliding rear window.

1

4x4 module.

1

4x4 solenoid.

1

Power telescoping mirrors.

1

Rear heated seats.

1

Trailer tow backup lamps (if equipped).

30A
25A
10A
10A

20A
10A

85

—

Not used.

86

—

Not used.

87

—

88
89
90
91

Not used.
1

10A
—

Multi contour seats.
Not used.

1

Spot light module.

1

Upfitter interface module.

10A
10A

92

—

Not used.

93

—

Not used.

94
95
96
97

1

15A

1

10A
5A

Transmission control module.
Powertrain control module keep alive
power.
Rain sensor.

1

1

10A

Run/Start control for Auxiliary power point
#5

322

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

98
99

Fuse Rating

10A
30A

Protected Components

1

Alternator sense.

1

Trailer tow parking lamps.

1 Micro

fuse.
case fuse.
3 J case fuse.
2M

Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.

Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of
the passenger footwell behind a trim panel.
To remove the trim panel, pull it toward
you and swing it away from the side. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves
on the panel, and then push it shut.

E145984

323

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses

Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Rating

1

—

2
3
4

Protected Components

Not used.
1

Memory seat switch (lumbar power).

1

Driver door unlock relay.

7.5A
20A
5A

Aftermarket electronic brake controller.
Trailer brake controller Brake On/Off.
Customer access circuits.

1

5

—

Not used.

6

—

Not used.

7

—

Not used.

8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15
16
17
18

19

2

Driver window switch mirror fold.

2

Brake On/Off / Pressure Switch.

10A
10A
—

Not used.

5A

Combined sense security module.

2

2

7.5A

2

7.5A

Extended power restraints module.

2

Smart datalink connector power.

1

Tailgate release solenoid.

10A

15A

Head-up display.

2

5A

Instrument cluster.
Smart data link.
Steering column control module.

2

10A

5A

Front climate control module.

Push button ignition switch.
Ignition switch.
Key inhibit.

2

2

7.5A

Transmission control switch (tow/haul).
Select Shift switch.

324

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

20
21
22

23

24
25
26
27
28

Fuse Rating

2

7.5A
5A
5A

Upfitter switch.
Run/Start.
PTO relays.

2

1

10A

1

1

30A

1

30A

Accessory delay.
Power windows.
Moonroof.
Power folding mirrors relay.
Inverter.
Window/moonroof switch illumination.
Central locking system relay.
Left-hand front smart window motor.
Door zone module.
Right-hand front smart window motor.
Door zone module.

1

Moonroof.

1

Sony amplifier - 10 channel.

30A
20A

Active front steering module.
Head-up display.
Humidity sensor.

2

20A

Protected Components

29

—

Not used.

30

—

Not used.

31
32

33
34
35

1

15A

1

10A

20A

1

SYNC.
GPS module.
Display.
Radio frequency receiver.

1

Radio.

1

Run-start relay.

30A
5A

Adjustable pedals switch.

Extended power restraints module.

325

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

36

Fuse Rating

1

15A

37

Lane keeping system.
Automatic high beam control.
Auto-dimming mirrors.
Rear heated seats.
Camera module.

1

Heated steering wheel.

3

Rear power window switch.

20A

38

Protected Components

30A

1 Micro

2 fuse.
3 fuse.
3 Circuit breaker.
2 Micro

CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.

326

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse Types

E207206

Callout

Fuse Type

A

Micro 2

B

Micro 3

C

Maxi

D

Mini

E

M Case

F

J Case

G

J Case Low Profile

327

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Working with the Engine On

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1.

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.

If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.

Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
of the instrument panel.

Precautions
•
•
•

•

Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.

E166491

2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever
under the front of the hood near the
center of your vehicle.

Working with the Engine Off
1.

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.

328

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.

E190266

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.2L

A

E222143

B

J

C

I

D

H

A.

Air filter. See Changing the
Engine Air Filter (page 362).

B.

Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 317).

G

329

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

F

E

C.

Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check
(page 346).

D.

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 349).

Maintenance
E.

Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 350).

F.

Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
338).

G.

H.

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 333).

I.

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 333).

J.

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 353).

Power steering fluid reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid
Check (page 350).

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.7L DIESEL
F-Super Duty

E234258

A.

Air filter restriction gauge. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 363).

B.

Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 317).

330

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

C.

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 333).

D.

Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check
(page 346).

Maintenance
E.

Engine oil fill. See Engine Oil
Check (page 333).

L.

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 353).

F.

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 349).

M.

G.

Engine cooling system coolant
reservoir (primary
high-temperature cooling
system). See Engine Coolant
Check (page 342).

Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 363).

H.

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 353).

I.

Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 350).

J.

Power steering fluid reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid
Check (page 350).

K.

Secondary cooling system
coolant reservoir. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 342).

Scheduled Maintenance
The recommended scheduled
maintenance services are required because
they are considered essential to the life
and performance of your vehicle. See
Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page
584).
Use only recommended fuel, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to Ford
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built for best performance
in your vehicle. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432).

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.8L

331

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
A

E222144

B

J

C

D

I

A.

Air filter. See Changing the
Engine Air Filter (page 362).

B.

Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 317).

C.

Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check
(page 346).

D.

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 333).

E.

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 349).

F.

Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 350).

G.

Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
338).

E

H

332

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

G

F

H.

Power steering fluid reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid
Check (page 350).

I.

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 333).

J.

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 353).

Maintenance
2. Run engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 328).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. For 6.2L V8 See
Under Hood Overview (page 329). For
6.8L Triton See Under Hood
Overview (page 331).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 333).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 420).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.2L/
6.8L

B

A

E161560

A

MIN

B

MAX

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.7L
DIESEL

A

B

Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.

E71362

A

MIN

B

MAX

Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).

Adding Engine Oil

ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.2L/6.8L

WARNING

To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1.

Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.

Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.

333

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.

ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.7L
DIESEL
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1.

Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 328).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 330).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 333).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 432).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.

E142732

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1.
2.

3.

4.
5.
6.

Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
Remove the engine oil filler cap. For
6.2L V8 See Under Hood Overview
(page 329). For 6.8L Triton See Under
Hood Overview (page 331).
Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 420).
Recheck the oil level.
If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.

334

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.

Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.

Engine lubrication for severe
service operation

Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).

The following conditions define severe
operation for which engine operation with
SAE 5W-40 oil which meets Ford
specification, WSS-M2C171-F1, is
recommended. Oil and oil filter change
intervals will be determined by the
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ as noted
previously.

Adding Engine Oil
WARNING
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
AND OIL FILTER

To top up the engine oil level do the
following:

WARNINGS
Do not handle a hot oil filter with
bare hands.

1.

Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 330).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil of the proper viscosity
and grade that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Continuous contact with used motor
oil has caused cancer in laboratory
mice. Protect your skin by washing
with soap and water.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel
engine, an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™
calculates the proper oil change service
interval. When the information display
indicates: OIL CHANGE REQUIRED, change
the engine oil and oil filter. See
Information Displays (page 113).
The engine oil filter protects your engine
by filtering harmful, abrasive or sludge
particles and particles significantly smaller
than most available will-fit filters. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 422).
1.

Unscrew the oil filter and oil pan drain
plug and wait for the oil to drain.
2. Replace the filter.
3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug.

Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.

335

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
4. Refill the engine with new oil. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
432).
5. For diesel engines, you need to reset
the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™. See
Information Displays (page 113).

CHANGING THE CRANKCASE
VENT FILTER ELEMENT (If
Equipped)

WARNING
Do not dispose of engine oil or oil
filters in the household refuse or the
public sewage system. Use an
authorized waste disposal facility.

Engine lubrication for severe
service operation
The following conditions define severe
operation for which engine operation with
SAE 5W-40 API CJ-4 is recommended. Oil
and oil filter change intervals will be
determined by the Intelligent Oil Life
Monitor™ as noted previously.
•
•
•

•

•
•
•
•

•
•

Do not clean or recondition the filter
element.
We recommend that you demand the use
of genuine Ford and Motorcraft® parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. Use the correct
specification filter element. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
432).

Frequent or extended idling (over 10
minutes per hour of normal driving).
Low-speed operation/stationary use.
If vehicle is operated in sustained
ambient temperatures below -9°F
(-23°C) or above 100°F (38°C).
Frequent low-speed operation,
consistent heavy traffic less than
25 mph (40 km/h).
Operating in severe dust conditions.
Operating the vehicle off road.
Towing a trailer over 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
Sustained, high-speed driving at Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum
loaded weight for vehicle operation).
Use of fuels with sulfur content other
than ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD).
Use of high-sulfur diesel fuel.

Note: Operating your vehicle without a filter
element or with an unapproved filter
element may result in damage to the turbo
charger or exchanger and could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.

336

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
1

5

6

4

A
B

3

C
E211404

7
2

8. Fully tighten all of the bolts to between
3–4 lb.ft (4.5–6 Nm) in the sequence
shown.
9. Record the engine mileage and update
the service log accordingly.
E211403

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

A

Filter cover.

B

Filter element.

C

Filter housing.

OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.

Clean the filter cover and remove the
bolts.
Carefully remove the filter cover.
Remove used filter element from the
filter housing and carefully dispose of
it.
Make sure that the sealing surfaces on
the filter housing and cover are clean
and free of debris.
Install the new filter element.
Install the filter cover.
Install the bolts finger-tight.

From the main menu scroll to:
Message

Action and description

Settings

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Convenience

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Oil Life
Reset

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

337

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Message

When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581).

Action and description

Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
Reset
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Reset Successful

Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.

When the oil change indicator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We
recommend, Robinair® Coolant and
Battery Refractometer 75240 (Rotunda
tool part number: ROB75240). We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.

Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled

Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK 6.2L/6.8L

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.

WARNINGS
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.
Do not put coolant in the windshield
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the
windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.

Adding Coolant
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.

338

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant meeting the correct specification
in order to avoid plugging the small
passageways in the engine cooling system.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 427). Incorrect prediluted coolant
use can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.

1. Drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
We recommend Motorcraft Premium
Cooling System Flush.
3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon
as possible.
Water alone, without prediluted coolant,
can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.

If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.

Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.

To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the
correct specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 420).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.

Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.

Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.

Do not mix different colors or types of
prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing
of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect
prediluted coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without prediluted
coolant in order to reach a vehicle service
location. On arrival do the following:

339

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Severe Climates

If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.

If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat
protection. Coolant concentrations
below 40% decrease the freeze and
corrosion protection characteristics of
the coolant and may cause engine
damage.

When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.

Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works

Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

If the engine begins to overheat, the
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone:

Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.

A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.

340

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to pull off the road. You can continue
to drive your vehicle.

Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1.

Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.

The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:

Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)

1.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the coolant temperature reduces.

2.

If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach higher a
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.

3.
4.

5.

At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.

341

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.

Maintenance
Adding Coolant

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK 6.7L DIESEL

WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal
injury.

WARNINGS
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

Do not put coolant in the windshield
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the
windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.

Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.

Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.

It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.

Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to Ford
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.

Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.

If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.

342

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems
with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant
recovery system, add coolant to the
coolant recovery reservoir when the engine
is cool. Add prediluted coolant to the
maximum level. For all vehicles which have
a coolant degas system with a pressurized
cap, or if it is necessary to remove the
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator,
follow these steps to add engine coolant:

If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.

1. Turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
3. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with
prediluted engine coolant to within the
minimum and maximum range on the
engine coolant reservoir. If you
removed the radiator cap in an
overflow system, fill the radiator until
the coolant is visible and the radiator
is almost full. If coolant is added to
bring the level within the minimum and
maximum range when the engine is not
cold, the system may remain under
filled.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the proper level.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved antifreeze concentrate
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 432).
Using water that has not been deionized
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion or plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.

Note: In case of emergency, you can add a
large amount of water without coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location.
Water alone, without coolant, can cause
engine damage from corrosion, overheating
or freezing. When you reach a service
location, you must have the cooling system
drained, flushed and refilled using the
correct specification prediluted coolant or
antifreeze concentrate. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 432).
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or non-specified
additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion
protection of the coolant.

343

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Engine and Secondary Cooling
System Refill Procedure

11.

The following procedure should be used
when refilling the engine or secondary
cooling systems after it has been drained
or become extremely low:
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.

6.
7.
8.

9.

10.

Before you remove the cap, turn the
engine off and let it cool.
When the engine is cool, wrap a thick
cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap
counterclockwise until pressure begins
to release.
Step back while the pressure releases.
When you are sure that all the pressure
has been released, use the cloth to turn
it counterclockwise and remove the
cap.
Slowly add prediluted engine coolant
to the coolant reservoir until the
coolant level is within the minimum
and maximum range as listed on the
reservoir.
Reinstall the pressure relief cap.
Start and run the engine at 2000 rpm
for 2 minutes.
Shut engine off, and remove the
pressure relief cap as previously
outlined.
If required, add prediluted engine
coolant to the coolant reservoir until
the coolant level is within the minimum
and maximum range as listed on the
reservoir.
Engine cooling system: Repeat
Step 5 until the coolant level has
stabilized (is no longer dropping after
each step) and the upper radiator
hose at the radiator is warm to the
touch (indicating that the engine
thermostat is open and coolant is
flowing through the radiator).

12.
13.

14.

Check the secondary cooling system.
Repeat Step 5 until the coolant level
has stabilized (is no longer dropping
after each step) and the lower
passenger side of the secondary
radiator is warm to the touch
(indicating secondary thermostat is
open and coolant is flowing through
the entire system).
Reinstall the pressure relief cap. Shut
the engine off and let it cool.
Check the coolant level in the
reservoir before you drive your vehicle
the next few times.
If necessary, add prediluted engine
coolant to the coolant reservoir until
the coolant level is within the
minimum and maximum range as
listed on the reservoir. After any
coolant has been added, check the
coolant concentration.

Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.

Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

344

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

•

•

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.

Checking Coolant Corrosion
Inhibitor Additive Strength
At specific mileage intervals as listed in the
scheduled maintenance information
chapter, the coolant corrosion inhibitor
additive should be checked. An information
message may display in the optional
information display at this time. The
purpose of checking is to verify the correct
engine coolant concentration (freeze point
protection) and corrosion inhibitor additive
level (strength) of the coolant for
maximum engine performance and
protection.
Three products are available to confirm
the life and health of the coolant, one tool,
a test kit and a coolant inhibitor additive:

•

Robinair® Coolant and Battery
Refractometer 75240 –
Recommended refractometer to test
coolant concentration. (Rotunda tool
part number: ROB75240).
Rotunda 328-R071–ELC (Antifreeze
Coolant ELC Contamination Kit) –
Evaluates the corrosion inhibitor
additive strength. Note the first step is
to verify the vehicle’s coolant
concentration is in the correct range of
40 – 60%. Coolant concentrations
outside this range will not provide valid
test results. If the report results in a
pass, for example the cooling system
does not show excessive
contamination, the corrosion inhibitor
additive strength is sufficient, and no
action is required. If the report results
as insufficient (does not pass), the
corrosion inhibitor additive strength of
the coolant is too low. If the engine
cooling system corrosion inhibitor
additive strength is low, add 47 fl oz
(1.4 L) of Motorcraft Specialty Orange
Engine Coolant Revitalizer. If the
secondary cooling system corrosion
inhibitor additive strength is low, add
16 fl oz (0.47 L) of Motorcraft Specialty
Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer.
Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant Revitalizer – Additive to
boost the corrosion inhibitor level
based upon the test results of the
Antifreeze Coolant ELC Contamination
Kit. The Revitalizer may be added two
times over the life of the coolant. If
additional dosages are required, the
cooling system must be flushed and
refilled per the instructions in the
Workshop Manual.

Make sure to follow the proper coolant and
additive specifications. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 420).

345

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Coolant Change

Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.

At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. The
information display may display a message
to change coolant at this time. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 420).

Checking Automatic Transmission
Fluid
For scheduled intervals of the fluid checks
and changes, See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked
if the transmission is not working properly,
i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly
or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.

Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan
Clutch)
Your vehicle may have an engine driven
cooling fan drive (also called a fan clutch).
This fan drive changes the fan speed to
match the vehicle’s changing cooling air
flow requirements. Fan speed, fan noise
level and fuel consumption all will increase
based on the driving conditions that
include trailer towing, hill climbing, heavy
loads, high speed and high ambient
temperature, individually or in combination.

Automatic transmission fluid expands
when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal
operating temperature (approximately
19 mi (30 km)). Verify that the
transmission fluid temperature gauge,
located on the instrument cluster, is within
normal range.

The fan drive is designed to provide the
minimum fan speed (and resulting
minimum fan noise and fuel consumption)
required to meet the ever changing vehicle
cooling air flow requirements. You will hear
the amount of fan noise increasing and
decreasing as the engine power
requirements and vehicle driving conditions
change as you drive. This is to be expected
as being normal to the operation of your
vehicle. High levels of fan noise might also
be heard when your engine is first started,
and should normally decrease after driving
for a short time.

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid and filter at
the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).

346

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Drive the vehicle 19 mi (30 km)until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
With the engine running, parking brake
engaged and your foot on the brake
pedal, move the gearshift lever through
all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient
time for each gear to engage.
Latch the gearshift lever in P and leave
the engine running.
Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean
with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to the Under Hood
Overview in this chapter for the
location of the dipstick.

Maintenance
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully
seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the
fluid level. The fluid should be in the
designated area for normal operating
temperature or ambient temperature.
Low Fluid Level
Type A
E163741

Type B

E163739

Type B
E163742

For vehicles equipped with 5-speed
transmissions, check the fluid at the
normal operating temperature of 151°F
(66°C) to 170°F (77°C) on a level surface.
For vehicles equipped with 6-speed
transmissions, check the fluid at the
normal operating temperature of 196°F
(91°C) to 215°F (102°C) on a level surface.
The normal operating temperature can be
reached after approximately 19 mi
(30 km).

E163740

Do not drive the vehicle if there is no
indication of fluid on the dipstick and the
ambient temperature is above 50°F
(10°C).

High Fluid Level
Type A

Correct Fluid Level
Type A

347

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
•
•

the dipstick handle.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 420).

If necessary, add fluid in 8 fl oz (250 ml)
increments through the filler tube until the
level is correct.
Type A

E163743

Type B

E163745

Type B

E163744

Fluid levels above the safe range may
result in transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid may cause
shift and engagement concerns, and
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an
overheating condition.

E163746

Adjusting Automatic Transmission
Fluid Levels

If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be
removed by a qualified technician.

Note: Use of a non-approved automatic
transmission fluid may cause internal
transmission component damage.

Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and engagement
concerns, and possible damage.

Before adding any fluid, make sure the
correct type is used. The type of fluid used
is normally indicated on:

348

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.

TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK (If Equipped)

Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.

E164246

1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the
fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through the filler
opening so that the fluid level is at the
bottom of the opening.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 420).

349

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel left and right several times.
5. Switch the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir.
Do not add fluid if the level is between
the MIN and MAX range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small
amounts, continuously checking the
level until it is between the MIN and
MAX range. For proper fluid type, See
Capacities and Specifications (page
420). Be sure to put the cap back on the
reservoir.

WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
E170684

If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 420).

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 420).

POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Check the power steering fluid. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). If
adding fluid is necessary, use only
MERCON LV ATF

State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.

Check the fluid level when it is at ambient
temperature.
1.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It
should be between the MIN and MAX
range. Do not add fluid if the level is
within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to between the MIN
and MAX range.
3. Switch the engine on.

350

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
You should drain water from the
module assembly whenever the
warning light illuminates or a
message appears in the information
display advising you to drain the water
separator. This occurs when approximately
6.76 fl oz (200 ml) of water accumulates
in the module. If you allow the water level
to exceed this level, the water may pass
through to the engine and may cause fuel
injection equipment damage.

DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP - 6.7L DIESEL
WARNING
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
Your vehicle has a diesel fuel conditioner
module. The module is mounted between
the outboard side of the fuel tank and the
frame rail.

Filter Location
Use the tables below to find the location
of your filter.

Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
on some models.
Pick-up Truck
Cab Type

Box Length

Regular.

8 ft (2.4 m)

SuperCab.

Super Crew Cab.

6.75 ft (2.057 m)
8 ft (2.4 m)
6.75 ft (2.057 m)

Filter Location

Left side of fuel tank.

In front of fuel tank.

8 ft (2.4 m)

Left side of fuel tank.

Cab Type

Fuel Tank Type

Filter Location

Chassis Cab.

Single midship fuel tank

Right side of fuel tank.

Chassis Cab.

Aft axle/midship fuel tanks

Right side of midship fuel
tank.

Chassis Cab.

Single aft axle fuel tank

Front of fuel tank.

Chassis Cab

2. Access the underside of your vehicle.

Draining the Diesel Fuel
Conditioner Module
1.

Switch the engine off.

351

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance

3

2

E226475

E226212

3. The diesel fuel conditioner module is
on the left-hand frame rail.

4. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner
module. Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
Drain the filter, approximately 0.5 gal
(2 L), into an appropriate container.
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
module.
5. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to
tighten the drain plug.

FUEL FILTER - 6.2L/6.8L
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.

352

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.

When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.

For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.

Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.

Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
This vehicle may have more than one
battery. Removing the battery cables
from only one battery does not
disconnect your vehicle electrical system.
Make sure you disconnect the battery
cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.

To restore the settings, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

353

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Apply the parking brake.
Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Switch off all accessories.
Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.

Maintenance
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.

5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the
power windows bounce-back feature.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 98).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 445).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.

A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.

Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.

Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.

Electrical Accessory Installation

If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.

To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.

Battery Management System (If
Equipped)

Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.

The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.

354

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES

A
E165794

E142463

2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and
separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you turn the ignition on.

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.

CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES

•

You can manually move the wiper arms
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.

•

Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
E165804

1.

Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.

355

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Headlamp Aiming Target

E142465

4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.

E142592

A

8 feet (2.4 meters)

B

Center height of lamp to ground

C

25 feet (7.6 meters)

D

Horizontal reference line

B

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

A

1.

Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.

E223774

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
Note: A. LED headlamp.
B. Halogen headlamp.

356

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
6. Repeat steps 3 thru 5 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.

CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.

E224990

Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.

1.

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 360).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.

Front Park and Direction Indicator
Lamp Bulbs

Headlamp Bulbs
Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs,
remove the air intake pipe. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 362).

Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs,
remove the air intake pipe. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 362).

To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove
the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with
diesel engine only.

To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove
the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with
diesel engine only.

357

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
1.

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Handle a halogen bulb carefully and
keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its plastic base and do not touch the
glass. The oil from your hand could cause
the bulb to break the next time the fog
lamps are operated.

E224991

1.

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp Bulbs
Pickup Models - Vehicles without Blind
Spot Information System

Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.

5

Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)

E223775

1.

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
E163826

358

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp
assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

Chassis Cabs

Pickup Models - Vehicles with Blind
Spot Information System
E163828

4

1.

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws and the lamp lens
from lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

Cargo Lamp and Central High
Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs
1.
E224204

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

5

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws and carefully pull
the lamp assembly from the vehicle to
expose the bulb sockets.

6

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
Remove the bolts from the tail lamp
assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
Remove the screws from the blind spot
information system module cover.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

E187290

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.

359

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

License Plate Lamp Bulb

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.

E163830

1.

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.

Exterior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

H13/9008

60/55

Front side marker lamps.

W5W

5

Front fog lamps.

9140

40

T20/7444NA

28/8

Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator and rear side marker
lamps. Low series.*

3157

27/7

Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator and rear side marker
lamps. High series.*

LED

LED

Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator and rear side marker
lamps.**

3157

27/7

Reversing lamps.*

W21W

21

Reversing lamps.**

3157

27/7

Headlamps.

Front direction indicator and parking
lamps.

360

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Lamp

*

Specification

Power (Watt)

License plate lamp. Low series.

168

5

License plate lamp. High series.

LED

LED

Central high mounted brake lamp.

912

12.8

Central high mounted cargo lamp.

912

12.8

Side direction indicator and mirror
clearance lamp.

LED

LED

Front clearance lamp.

LED

LED

Rear clearance lamp.

LED

LED

Front identification lamp.

LED

LED

Rear identification lamp.

LED

LED

Underhood lamp.

LED

LED

Pickup only.

**

Chassis cab only.

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

Map lamp.

LED

LED

Glove compartment lamp.

LED

LED

Interior lamp.

LED

LED

Overhead console lamp.

LED

LED

Luggage compartment lamp.

LED

LED

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

361

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 6.2L/6.8L

x4

WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.

2

3

Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
422).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

4
1

Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581).

E226426

1.

Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector. (6.8L only)
2. Remove the air intake tube securing
clamp.
3. Pull the air intake tube away from the
air filter housing.
4. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Remove the air
filter housing cover.

362

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance

x4

5

4
3
2

E226427

5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Install in the reverse order.

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 6.7L DIESEL

1

WARNING

E226429

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.

1.

Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector.
2. Remove the air intake tube securing
clamp.
3. Pull the air intake tube away from the
air filter housing.
4. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Remove the air
filter housing cover.

Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
422).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581).

363

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Air Filter Restriction Gauge

5

6
E226430

5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Remove the foam filter from the air
filter housing.
7. Install in the reverse order.

E226428

The air filter restriction gauge is in the
upper housing of the air filter assembly.
Check the air filter restriction gauge
whenever you open the hood to carry out
general engine maintenance or at least
every 7,500 mi (12,000 km). If you operate
your vehicle in extremely dusty conditions,
check the gauge at least every 500 mi
(800 km) or two weeks, whichever occurs
first. Change the air filter element when
the restriction gauge reads near the
change filter line and the gauge is yellow.
Allowing the restriction gauge to reach
maximum affects engine performance and
fuel economy.

364

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Operating your vehicle in heavy snowfall
or extreme rain conditions may allow
excessive amounts of snow or water into
the air intake system. This could restrict air
flow and cause the engine to lose power
or shut down.

Your vehicle has two fuel filters. The first
filter mounts on top of the engine on the
left-hand side. The second filter is inside
the diesel fuel conditioner module. The
module is attached to the fuel tank in
different locations depending on the
configuration of your truck. See table
below for configurations.

After installing a new air filter element, you
must reset the gauge by pressing the reset
button.

Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
on some models.

After operating your vehicle during heavy
snowfall or extreme rain, do the following:
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear any snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet and
reset the air filter restriction gauge.
• Extreme rain: The air filter element
dries out after approximately 15–30
minutes of driving at highway speeds.
At the earliest opportunity, open the
hood and reset the air filter restriction
gauge.

Regular fuel filter changes are an
important part of engine maintenance;
failing to keep with the scheduled
maintenance could lead to engine
performance issues and fuel injection
system damage. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581).
Use only recommended service parts
conforming to specifications. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 422).
Note: Using fuel that has high levels of
impurities may require more frequent filter
replacements than the service interval
specifies.

Note: Do not remove the foam filter.

CHANGING THE ENGINEMOUNTED AND DIESEL FUEL
CONDITIONER MODULE FUEL
FILTERS - 6.7L DIESEL

Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module
Filter
Filter Location

WARNING

Use the tables below to find the location
of your filter.

Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.

365

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance

Pick-up Truck
Cab Type

Box Length

Regular.

8 ft (2.4 m)

SuperCab.

Super Crew Cab.

6.75 ft (2.057 m)
8 ft (2.4 m)
6.75 ft (2.057 m)

Filter Location

Left side of fuel tank.

In front of fuel tank.

8 ft (2.4 m)

Left side of fuel tank.

Cab Type

Fuel Tank Type

Filter Location

Chassis Cab.

Single midship fuel tank

Right side of fuel tank.

Chassis Cab.

Aft axle/midship fuel tanks

Right side of midship fuel
tank.

Chassis Cab.

Single aft axle fuel tank

Front of fuel tank.

Chassis Cab

2. Locate your filter.

Removal

E247666

1.

For 2017 models, disconnect the fuel
line quick connect coupling from the in
tank fuel pump. For 2018 models and
later, skip this step but insure that the
fuel filler cap is closed before draining
the filter. If the cap isn't closed, the
filter will siphon the fuel tank even with
the anti-siphon valve.
366

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance

6

3
4

E226213

5

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Fully loosen the bolts securing the
lower portion of the diesel fuel
conditioner module housing.
Note: Do not fully remove the bolts from
the lower portion of the diesel fuel
conditioner module housing.

E226212

3. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner
module. Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
Drain the filter, approximately 0.53 gal
(2 L), into an appropriate container.
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
module.

6. Remove the lower portion of the diesel
fuel conditioner module housing.

367

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
The engine-mounted fuel filter is a plastic
disposable cartridge.

7

Removal

1

E226563

7.

E226215

Slide the filter element toward the
drain plug to disengage the securing
clips.

1.

Installation

Disconnect the fuel lines by squeezing
the connector tabs and pulling the lines
straight off.

3

1.

Slide the filter element into the housing
and fully engage the securing clips.
2. Install the lower portion of the housing.
Tighten the bolts until you feel a strong
resistance. Maximum torque 7 lb.ft
(9 Nm).
3. Connect the electrical connector.
4. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to
tighten the drain plug.

2

Engine-mounted Fuel Filter
E226214

Although the fuel system is not fully
pressurized when the vehicle is off, some
residual pressure may remain in the fuel
system since it can take some time for the
pressure to completely bleed off.
Therefore, we recommend you place an
absorbent cloth below the filter connectors
to absorb any fuel that may drain.

2. Rotate the filter fully counterclockwise
until the peg is at the far end of the slot.
3. Pull the filter straight up from the
bracket and discard the filter.

368

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Maintenance
Installation
1.

Install the new filter into the filter
bracket. Turn the filter clockwise to
lock it in place.
2. Reconnect the fuel lines.

369

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION

CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.

Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:

Name

Specification

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M5B194-B

Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P4-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P3-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)

WSS-M99P43-B

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
•

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.

•

370

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.

Vehicle Care
•

•

•

Exterior Plastic Parts

Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.

For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
•

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.

•
•
•

Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.

Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.

Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.

Exterior Chrome Parts

Underbody

•

Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.

•

•

Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.

Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.

WAXING

Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.

Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

371

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•
•
•
•

•
•

•

Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.

•

•

•

Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.

CLEANING THE EXHAUST 6.7L DIESEL
WARNINGS
Failure to maintain the functional
holes, in the tailpipe section of the
exhaust, clean and free of debris or
foreign material may result in the holes
becoming blocked or plugged. Do not
modify or remove the tail-pipe section.
Blocked or plugged holes or
removal/modification of the system could
result in elevated exhaust gas
temperatures which may result in
vehicle/property damage or personal
injury.

CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.

The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter and/or the diesel
particulate filter (DPF). The diesel

When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.

372

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.

WARNINGS
oxidation catalytic converter and/or the
DPF heats up to a high temperature after
only a short period of engine operation and
can stay hot even after the engine is turned
off. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.

Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

E163380

The visible holes in the exhaust tip and the
holes under the shield just inboard of the
right rear tire(s) are functional. The holes
need to be kept clear of mud/debris or
foreign material to maintain proper
function of the exhaust system. Clean and
remove debris or foreign material if present
as needed. Spraying with a hose during
regular washing of vehicle should help
keep holes clean and clear of debris or
foreign material.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as
these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
crash.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.

373

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.

Note: Microfiber cloth fabric is made of
polyester microfiber with micro-porous
polyurethane. Using commercially available
fabric cleaners can cause permanent
damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Your vehicle may have microfiber
cloth fabric on the seats, headliner, floor
mats and door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning microfiber cloth,
refer to the following chart:

Type of Stain

Cleaning Procedure

Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.

Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing
with clean water.

Blood, egg, excrement or urine.

Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water. Avoid warm water because it
makes these substances coagulate.

Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola Use lukewarm water. If the color remains,
and tea.
treat with lemon juice and then rinse.
Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry
with cream or chocolate, ice cream or
mustard.

Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing
with clean water.

Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee
with sugar.

Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water
and rinse by dabbing with clean water.

Dye transfer and all other stains.

Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.

374

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
1.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS

2.

WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.

3.

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 375).

4.

Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.

5.

•

6.

•

•

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)

Without King Ranch Edition
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:

Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.

375

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
You should:
•
•

•

Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.

•

Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
•
•
•
•

Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
Household cleaners.
Alcohol solutions.
Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.

Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
evidence of naturally occurring markings,
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.

With King Ranch Edition

In order to lessen the appearance of
certain scratches and other wear marks,
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Conditioning section.

Your vehicle has seating covered in
premium, top-grain leather that is
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.

Conditioning

Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather.

Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Shop. Visit the website at
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United
States. If you are unable to obtain King
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another
premium leather conditioner.

Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution.
•
•

Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
orange juice or oil-based products on
the leather as they may permanently
stain the leather.
Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.

•

Clean spills as quickly as possible.
Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather as
cleaners may darken the leather.

•

•

376

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the Cleaning section.
Make sure the leather is dry then apply
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
to a clean, dry cloth.
Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.

Vehicle Care
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.

Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.

We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.

Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.

CLEANING THE WHEELS (If
Equipped)

General

1.

Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.

•

If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.

•

•
•

Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.

Body
•

•
•

Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.

•

377

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.

Vehicle Care
•
•

Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.

Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.

Brakes

Engine
•

•

•

•

•

Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.

Tires
•

•

•

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.

Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.

Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.

Battery
•
•

Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From Storage

Cooling system
•
•

Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous

Fuel system
•

Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.

Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.

378

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
•

•

Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.

379

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners

GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have the system reprogrammed.
If you intend to change the size of the
wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.

WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 382).

In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.

The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door last post;
next to the driver’s seating position).

Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.

Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).

E145298

380

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.

Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
is a significant difference between the size
of a spare and the remaining tires,
four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
(page 214).

Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.

How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles

Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)

Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:

WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 214). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 328). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.

E145299

381

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
•

•

•

Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.

As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.

TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.

E168583

382

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.

Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
383

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.

test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.

384

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.

Information on P Type Tires

C D
B

E

F

G
H

A

I

J

M

L

K

E142543

Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall

P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example).
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.

Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.

385

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.

B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the
following chart.

Letter
rating

mph ( km/h)

M

81 (130)

N

87 (140)

Q

99 (159)

R

106 (171)

S

112 (180)

T

118 (190)

U

124 (200)

H

130 (210)

V

149 (240)

W

168 (270)

Y
186 (299)
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
386

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:

*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear 1½ times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
387

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.

that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.

B

C

A

Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.

D
E142544

B

LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
388

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

B
A

C

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.

D
E

Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.

E142545

T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.

389

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than

You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
390

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.

Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.

391

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, (see the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.

All tires with Steel Carcass Plies
(if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords
in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light
truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be
performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped
according to Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Administration
regulations. For example, during
any procedure involving tire
inflation, the technician or
individual must utilize a remote
inflation device, and ensure that
all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.
WARNING
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.

Tire Inflation Information
WARNING
An inflated tire and rim can
be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or
maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to
re-inflate a tire which has been run
flat or seriously under-inflated
without first removing the tire
from the wheel assembly for
inspection. Do not attempt to add
air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking
precautions to protect persons
and property.
392

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

E161437

it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:

Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
393

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.

Tire Wear

Age
WARNINGS
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear or even
if they have not been used.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high-load
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require you
to replace tires more frequently.
You should replace your
spare tire when you replace
the road tires or after six years due
to aging even if it has not been
used.

E142546

When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed

394

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number

WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.

Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.

395

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.

WARNINGS
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure
more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford dealer or other
tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.

Replacing a Tire That is
Greenhouse Gas Certified
The tires installed on this vehicle
at the factory as original
equipment are certified for
Greenhouse Gas and Fuel
Efficiency regulations.
Replacement tires must be of
equal or lower rolling resistance
level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with
your tire supplier(s) for
appropriate replacement tires.

Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.

396

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices

If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.

WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.

Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.

*Observe posted speed limits.
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road.
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.

397

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation

Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometime
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.

WARNING
If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle
has a tire pressure monitoring
system, then you need to update
the settings for the system
sensors. Always perform the
system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If you do not reset the
system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.

E142548

Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram).

398

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

E166988

Dual rear wheel drive vehicle - six
tire rotation (front tires at top of
diagram).
If your vehicle is equipped with
dual rear wheels it is
recommended that the front and
rear tires (in pairs) be rotated only
side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be
adjusted for the tires new
positions in accordance with
vehicle requirements.

E227387

Note: When installing 17-inch dual
rear wheels, align the valve stems
facing each other.

399

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
•

USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.

The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:

•
•

If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring
System

Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles
with 20 inch wheels and tires.

•

•

Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.

If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
Use only SAE Class S chains.
Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.

WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)

400

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.

When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.

401

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System

The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, one or more of your tires are
under-inflated and needs to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.

Single Rear Wheel

When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.

E224333

Dual Rear Wheel

To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:

E224332

402

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

Low tire pressure
warning light

Possible cause

Customer action required

Solid warning light

Tire under inflated

Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.

Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Flashing warning
light

Tire rotation without
sensor training

On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 382).

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.

Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

403

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure

When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.

WARNING
To determine the required
pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or
the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door.

It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure

Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation.

The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure.

To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated
to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.

If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.

System reset tips:

404

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
•

•

•

To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the
system reset procedure at least three
feet (one meter) away from another
Ford Motor Company vehicle
undergoing the system reset procedure
at the same time.
Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels.
A double horn will sound indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.

5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following clockwise order: Left front
(driver's side front tire), Right front
(passenger's side front tire), Right rear
(passenger's side rear tire), Left rear
(driver's side rear tire).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
double horn is heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.

Performing the System Reset Procedure
(Single Rear Wheel)
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.

7.

Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
side rear tire), the system indicator
stops flashing, and a message is shown
in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.

Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes,
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn
will sound once, the system indicator
will flash and a message is shown in
the information display. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step
2. If after repeated attempts to enter
the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not
flash and no message is shown in the
information display, seek service from
your authorized dealer.

1.

405

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
11.

Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position)
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.

5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following order: Left front (driver's side
front tire), Right front (passenger's side
front tire), Right outer rear (passenger's
side rear outer tire), Right inner rear
(passenger's side rear inner tire), Left
outer rear (driver's side rear outer tire),
Left inner rear (driver's side rear inner
tire).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
double horn is heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.

Performing the System Reset Procedure
(Dual Rear Wheel)
For further information see
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System and refer to Dual
Rear Wheel, earlier in this section.
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1.

Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes,
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all six tires and have
access to an air pump.

7.

2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn
will sound once, the system indicator
will flash and a message is shown in
the information display. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step
2. If after repeated attempts to enter
the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not
flash and no message is shown in the
information display, seek service from
your authorized dealer.

8.

9.

10.

11.

406

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right outer rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn
sounds.
Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right inner rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn
sounds.
Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left outer rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the
horn sounds.
Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left inner rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the
horn sounds. Training is complete
after the horn sounds for the last tire
trained, the system indicator stops
flashing, and a message is shown in
the information display.

Wheels and Tires
12.

13.

Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.
Set all six tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position)
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.

The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
is an added safety feature that allows you
to view your trailer tire pressures through
the information display. See General
Information (page 113). Tire pressure
sensors are mounted into each tire on your
trailer. The sensors send a message to your
vehicle indicating the current trailer tire
pressure.
If the trailer tire pressure monitoring
system detects that a tire is low, a warning
message appears in the information
display. The trailer tire pressure status
screen in the information display highlights
the tire with a low pressure.
The main function of the trailer tire
pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your trailer tires need air. It can also
warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended.
See Information Messages (page 129).

Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (If Equipped)
Note: Additional equipment may be
required for your vehicle to support trailer
tire pressure monitoring. See your authorized
dealer for more information.

When a Temporary Spare or New Tire
is Installed

Note: The trailer tire pressure monitoring
system is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance. It is your responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures at all times.

If you have replaced a trailer tire with a new
or spare tire, a warning message appears
and pressure readings are no longer
displayed for that tire.

Note: If a trailer tire is repaired, replaced or
broken down for service, the screw and valve
on the trailer tire pressure sensor should be
replaced. See your authorized dealer for
details.

To restore the full function of the trailer
tire pressure monitoring system:
• Have the damaged wheel and tire
assembly repaired and remounted to
your trailer.
• Install the trailer tire pressure
monitoring sensor into the new wheel
and tire assembly.
• Perform the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Reset Procedure
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation, or when a new trailer tire
pressure sensor is installed into a trailer tire.

E235807

407

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information

The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
can be reset through the menu in the
information display. See General
Information (page 113). Performing the
trailer setup process also resets the trailer
tire pressure monitoring system.

WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.

WARNING
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged it may not
function.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
tire pressure monitoring system, the
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels.

Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.

Full-size dissimilar spare
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.

If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, have a flat
serviced by an authorized dealer in order
to prevent damage to the system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 400). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the system
sensor for damage.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD.
• Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is
stationary.
• Use 4WD on dry pavement.

408

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.

Location of the Spare Tire and
Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire,
jack and associated tools, see the
following table for their locations:
Tool

Location

Spare tire - pick-up trucks only

Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper.

Jack

Fastened to the floor pan behind the rearmost seat on the passenger side.

Jack handle, lug wrench, lug wrench exten- Regular Cab: Fastened to floor behind the
sion - only available on dual rear wheel
driver seat.
vehicles and wheel chock - only available Super Cab and Crew Cab: Fastened to the
on single rear wheel vehicles equipped with floor under the rear seat on the driver's side.
a diesel engine.

Removing the Spare Tire (With
Spare Tire Carrier Only)
The following tools are required to remove
the spare tire:

E162795

409

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
One handle extension and two typical
extensions. To assemble, align the button
with the hole and slide the parts together.

1.

Use the ignition key to open the lock at
the rear bumper.
2. Fully insert the jack handle, with one
extension, through the bumper hole
and into the guide tube. You feel some
resistance when you turn the jack
handle assembly.
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise and
lower the spare tire until you can slide
the tire rearward and the cable is slack.
4. Remove the retainer through the center
of the wheel.

To disconnect, press the button and pull
apart.

E162796

One wheel nut wrench. Slide over the
square end of the jack handle.

E162800

5. If not replacing the spare or flat tire to
the underbody storage area, raise the
wheel retainer up into the installed
position.

Tire Change Procedure
E162797

WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).

E227181

410

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when changing a wheel, shift
the transmission into park (P), set
the parking brake and use an appropriate
block or wheel chock to secure the wheel
diagonally opposite to the wheel being
changed. For example, when changing the
front left wheel, place an appropriate block
or wheel chock on the right rear wheel.
Do not get under a vehicle that is only
supported by a vehicle jack.

E142551

Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.

1.

Turn the engine off and block the wheel
that is diagonally opposite of the flat
tire using the wheel chock.
Note: Lock the manual hub on the wheel
if the vehicle is a 4x4.

Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.

2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug
wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove
any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut ½ turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
Note: For vehicles with dual rear wheels,
insert the lug wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.

Only use the spare wheel carrier to
stow the wheel provided with your
vehicle. Other wheel sizes could
cause the spare wheel carrier to fail if it
does not fit securely or is too heavy.
Note: Do not use impact tools or power
tools operating at over 200 RPM on the
spare wheel carrier winch, which may cause
it to malfunction and prevent a secure fit.
Override the winch at least three times
(there is an audible click each time) to make
sure the wheel and tire fit securely.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.

411

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel
Vehicles

E162803

Front driver side (4x4)
E162801

Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat
area on the outboard side of the differential.

1.

Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the handle
to slide the jack under the vehicle.
2. Position the jack according to the
following guides:

E162804

Front passenger side (4x4)
Note: View shown from the rear of the
vehicle to clearly identify the jack point.
Place the jack directly under the axle.

E162802

Front (4x2)

E162805

412

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
7.

Stow the jack, jack handle and lug
wrench. Make sure the jack is securely
fastened so it does not rattle when
driving.
8. Unblock the wheels.
1

Rear
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Jacking the Vehicle

6

7

4

3

5

8
E161441

E162811

1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

6.

2

8-lug nut torque sequence

Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the ground
and high enough to install the spare
tire.
Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward for all front wheels and single
rear wheel vehicles. If you are replacing
an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel
vehicles, the valve stem must be facing
outward. If you are replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must
be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the wheel has been lowered.
Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 418).
Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat
or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire carrier.

10

1

3

8

5

6
7

E169375

4
2

9

10-lug nut torque sequence

E162820

413

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
When installing the wheel center
ornaments, make sure that the ornament
retention towers on the back side of the
ornament are aligned with the studs or lug
nuts. The retention towers are designed to
be installed over the studs or nuts and
retain to the flange on the lug nut.

1.

Slide the notched end of the jack
handle over the release valve and use
the handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle. Make sure the valve is closed
by turning it clockwise.
2. Position the jack according to the
following guides:

E162821

E162813

If the ornament retention towers are
aligned between the studs or lug nuts, the
ornament is improperly installed. This
improper installation may appear and
sound correct, but does not keep the
ornament on the vehicle. Ornaments
improperly installed in this manner, fall off
or become loose with minimal force or
impact.

Front (4x2): F-350 dual rear wheel
Note: Place the jack directly under the
I-beam.

F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and
F-550 Vehicles

E162814

Front driver side (4x4): F-350 dual rear
wheel
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat
area on the outboard side of the differential
housing.
E162812

414

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

E162815

E162817

Front passenger side (4x4): F-350 dual
rear wheel

Rear: F-350 dual rear wheel

Note: View shown from the rear of the
vehicle to clearly identify the jack point.
Note: Place the jack directly under the axle
and inboard of the radius arm so that the
jack clears the radius arm.

E162818

Rear: F-450 and F-550
Jacking the Vehicle

E162816

Front: F-450 and F-550

E162819

1.

415

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Insert the jack handle into the pump
linkage.

Wheels and Tires
2. Use an up-and-down motion with the
jack handle to raise the wheel
completely off the ground.
Note: Hydraulic jacks are equipped with a
pressure release valve that prevents lifting
loads which exceed the jack's rated
capacity.

1
6

7

4

3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
4. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward on all front an inboard rear
wheels. If you are replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must
be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the wheel has been lowered.
5. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the
release valve counterclockwise.
Opening the release valve slowly
provides a more controlled rate of
descent.
6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 418).
7. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat
or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire carrier.
8. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug
wrench. Make sure the jack is securely
fastened so it does not rattle when
driving.
9. Unblock the wheels.

3

5

8
E161441

2

8-lug nut torque sequence
10

1

3

8

5

6
7

E169375

4
2

9

10-lug nut torque sequence
Installing Dual Rear Wheel Ornaments

A

B

E162822

1.

416

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Align the ornament with the lug nuts.
A is the clip and B is the flange.

Wheels and Tires

E162823

E162825

2. Hold the ornament so that all of the
retention clips are sitting on the flange
of the lug nuts.

A
C

D
B

E162826

Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
E162824

Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage
instructions may result in failure of cable or
loss of spare tire.

3. Use your hand or rubber mallet to tap
the ornament in a star pattern. There
should be an even gap between the
ornament and the wheel.
4. Be sure to install all the clips on the
nuts over the flanges so that there is
an even gap all around and the
retention clips are fully seated.

1.

Place the tire on end with the valve
stem facing toward the front of the
vehicle.

E162800

417

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
2. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
3. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. Pull on the cable to
align the components at the end of the
cable.
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The effort to
turn the jack handle increases
significantly and the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips when the tire is raised
to the maximum tightness. Tighten to
the best of your ability, to the point
where the ratchet/slip occurs, if
possible. The spare tire carrier does not
allow you to overtighten. If the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips with little
effort, take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer for assistance at your
earliest convenience.

5. Check that the tire lies flat against the
frame and is properly tightened. Try to
push or pull, then turn the tire to be
sure it does not move. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to
properly stow the spare tire may result
in failure of the winch cable and loss
of the tire.
6. Repeat this tightness check procedure
when servicing the spare tire pressure,
every six months, per scheduled
maintenance information, or at any
time that the spare tire is disturbed
through service of other components.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.

418

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Bolt size

lb.ft (Nm)

M14 x 1.5

165 lb.ft (224 Nm)

*

Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque
at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing
a flat tire, wheel removal).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified
torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at 500 miles (800 kilometers) of new
vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat
tire, wheel removal).
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque procedures.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer
and the nut. Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads.

E161443

E145950

A

Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.

419

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L
Engine

6.2L V8 Engine

Cubic inches

378

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

0.041-0.047 in (1.04-1.20 mm)

Compression ratio

9.8:1

Drivebelt Routing

E163761

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL
Engine

6.7L Diesel

Cubic inches

406

Required fuel

Low Sulfur Diesel up to B20

Firing order

1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8

Compression ratio

16.2:1

420

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing

Dual Alternator

Single Alternator

E224820
E224819

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.8L
Engine

6.8L V10 Engine

Cubic inches

413

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

0.039 - 0.043 in (1.00 - 1.10 mm)

Compression ratio

9.2:1

421

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing

6.8L Engines without A/C

6.8L Engines with A/C

E163763

E163762

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.2L
Component

Motorcraft Part number

Air filter element

FA-1928

Oil filter

FL-820-S

Battery (XL)

BXT-65-650

Battery (all except XL)

BXT-65-750

Spark plugs-platinum

SP-526

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2247

Transmission fluid filter

FT-187

Cabin air filter

FP-79

For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available
at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle
performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related
to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).

422

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.7L DIESEL
Component

Motorcraft Part number

Engine oil filter

FL-2051S

Foam pre-filter

FA-1927

Air filter

FA-1926

Fuel filter

FG-1147

Battery (Two)

BXT-65-750

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2247

Cabin air filter

FP-79

Transmission filter

FT-187

For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available
at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle
performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related
to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.

423

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.8L
Component

Motorcraft Part number

Air filter element.

FA-1928

Oil filter.

FL-820-S

Battery (XL).

BXT-65-650

Battery (all except XL).

BXT-65-750

Spark plugs-platinum.

SP-509

Windshield wiper blade.

WW-2247

Transmission fluid filter

FT-187

Cabin air filter.

FP-79

For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available
at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle
performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related
to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 584).

424

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.

E142477

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:

425

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

A

World manufacturer identifier

B

Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations

C

Make, vehicle line, series, body
type

D

Engine type

E

Check digit

F

Model year

G

Assembly plant

H

Production sequence number

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL

TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION

E167469
E167814

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.

The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.

Description

Code

Six-speed automatic transmission 6R140

P

Six-speed automatic transmission 6R100

S

Six-speed automatic transmission 6R140W

W

426

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil (with oil filter)

7.0 qt (6.6 L)

Engine coolant

21.3 qt (20.2 L)

Brake fluid

Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
reservoir

Front axle

2.7 qt (2.6 L)

Rear axle-10.5 inch (E-Locker)

3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)

Rear axle-10.5 inch (non E-Locker)

3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)

Rear axle-Dana M300

3.78 qt (3.58 L) *

Automatic transmission fluid (6R100)

16.7 qt (15.8 L) **

Automatic transmission fluid (6R140)

17.4 qt (16.5 L) **

Transfer case fluid

1.9 qt (1.8 L)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle
location)

26.5 gal (100.3 L)

Fuel tank (All except 176 inch wheelbase
and incomplete vehicles)

34.5 gal (130.6 L)

Fuel tank (176 inch wheelbase)

48.5 gal (183.6 L)

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle location)

40 gal (151.4 L)

427

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

A/C refrigerant

27 oz (0.77 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil

4.1 fl oz (120 ml)

*For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. This added friction
modifier should be included in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
**Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-A

Optional motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS

WSS-M2C946-A

Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12

WSS-M2C946-A

Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Front axle fluid :
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant

428

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (10.50 inch axle) (E-Locker/non E-Locker): WSS-M2C942-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300 except 3.73 ratio Chassis
WSP-M2C197-A
Cab) (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Friction Modifier
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3

EST-M2C118-A

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.) :
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-LV12
Transfer case fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Transfer case fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Power steering fluid:
Motorcraft® MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Spindle bearing:
High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing
Grease
XG-11

WSS-M2C192-A

Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

429

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

-

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

-

Transmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake
pedal shift:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E

WSD-M1C227-A

We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.

430

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.

Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.

Materials
Name

Specification

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
WSS-M2C953-A1
XO-0W30-QSP

431

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications

E240523

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil (includes filter change)

13.0 qt (12.3 L)

Engine coolant (primary high-temperature
cooling system loop)

35.1 qt (33.2 L)

1

Engine coolant additive (primary hightemperature cooling system loop)

47.3 fl oz (1.4 L)

2

Engine coolant (secondary cooling system)

15.1 qt (14.3 L)

Engine coolant additive (secondary cooling
system)

16.0 fl oz (473 ml)

1

2

Brake fluid

Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
reservoir

Front axle

2.7 qt (2.6 L)

Rear axle-10.5 inch (E-Locker)

3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)

432

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

Rear axle-10.5 inch (non E-Locker)

3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)

Rear axle- Dana M275

3.61 qt (3.42 L)

Rear axle- Dana M300

3.78 qt (3.58 L)

Automatic transmission fluid

17.4 qt (16.5 L)

Transfer case fluid

3

4,5

1.9 qt (1.8 L)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

Fuel Tank (142 inch and 148 inch wheelbase, middle location)

29.0 gal (109.8 L)

Fuel Tank (160 inch and 164 inch wheelbase, middle location)

34.0 gal (128.7 L)

Fuel Tank (176 inch wheelbase, middle
location)

48 gal (181.7 L)

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle
location)

106.0 qt (100.3 L)

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle location)

40.0 gal (151.4 L)

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Middle and
Aft- axle -locations)

66.5 gal (251.7 L)

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (complete
vehicle)

7.4 gal (28 L)

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (incomplete
vehicle)

7.2 gal (27.3 L)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

433

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

A/C refrigerant

27 oz (0.77 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil

3.4 fl oz (100 ml)

6

1

Use the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Using any other coolant may
result in vehicle damage.
2

Per addition if required.

3

For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A this added friction
modifier should be included in the total lube volume 3.58 L (3.78 qt).
4

Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

5

Capacities may be higher if the vehicle is equipped with a cooler. Always check to make
sure the fluid level is in the acceptable range.
6

This system uses mineral-based refrigerant oil to lubricate O-rings and fittings.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):

WSS-M2C171-F1

Motorcraft® SAE 10W-30 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil
XO-10W30-QSD

1

Recommended motor oil (Canada):

WSS-M2C171-F1

Motorcraft® SAE 10W-30 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil
CXO-10W30-LSD12

1

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):

WSS-M2C171-F1

Motorcraft® SAE 15W-40 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil
XO-15W40-QSD

1,3

Recommended motor oil (Canada):

WSS-M2C171-F1

Motorcraft® SAE 15W-40 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil
CXO-15W40-LSD12

1,3

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):

WSS-M2C171-F1
1,2,3

Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor Oil
XO-5W40-5QSD
Recommended motor oil (U.S.):

WSS-M2C171-F1

434

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification
1

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor Oil
XO-0W40-DAS
Engine and secondary cooling system coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine and secondary cooling system coolant (Canada): WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
Engine and secondary cooling system coolant additive -(U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® Specialty Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer
VC-12
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF):
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid
PM-27-Gal / PM-27-Jug

WSS-M99C130-A

Cetane Booster & Performance Improver (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Cetane Booster & Performance Improver
PM-22-A

--

Cetane Booster & Performance Improver (Canada):
Motorcraft® Cetane Booster & Performance Improver
PM-22-B

--

Anti-Gel & Performance Improver (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Anti-Gel & Performance Improver
PM-23-A

--

Anti-Gel & Performance Improver (Canada):
Motorcraft® Anti-Gel & Performance Improver
PM-23-B

--

Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Front axle fluid :
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (10.50 inch axle) (E-Locker/non E-Locker): WSS-M2C942-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant

435

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

XY-75W85-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M275) (U.S.):
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M275) (Canada):
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (U.S.):
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada) :
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Friction Modifier
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3

EST-M2C118-A

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-QLVC
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSB-M8B16-A2

Transfer case fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Transfer case fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Power steering fluid:
Motorcraft® MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Spindle bearing:

WSS-M2C192-A

436

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing
Grease
XG-11
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

--

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

--

Transmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake
pedal shift:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E

WSD-M1C227-A

3

For biodiesel fuel blends (B20 max), use
SAE 5W-40 or SAE 15W-40 oil that meets
Ford specification WSS-M2C171-F1.

1

See the SAE viscosities grades chart for
correct temperature usage.
2

For severe duty service, use SAE 5W-40
oil that meets Ford specification
WSS-M2C171-F1.

437

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
Note: An engine block heater is
recommended at temperatures below
–10°F (–23°C).

Engine Oil Specifications
The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel
engines is important for satisfactory
operation. Determine which oil viscosity
best suits the temperature range you
expect to encounter for the next service
interval from the following SAE viscosity
grade chart.

E163370

438

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.8L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil (with oil filter)

7.0 qt (6.6 L)

Engine coolant

26.7 qt (25.3 L)

Brake fluid

Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
reservoir

Front axle

2.7 qt (2.6 L)

Rear axle-10.5 inch (E-Locker)

3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)

Rear axle-10.5 inch (non E-Locker)

3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)

Rear axle-Dana M300

3.78 qt (3.58 L)

Automatic transmission fluid

17.4 qt (16.5 L)

Transfer case fluid

1

2

1.9 qt (1.8 L)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle
location)

26.5 gal (100.3 L)

439

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle location)

40 gal (151.4 L)

A/C refrigerant

27 oz (0.77 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil

4.1 fl oz (120 ml)

1

For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. This added friction
modifier should be included in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
2

Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C945-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12

WSS-M2C945-A

Optional motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-A

Optional motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS

WSS-M2C946-A

Optional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12

WSS-M2C946-A

Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

440

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Front axle fluid :
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (10.50 inch axle) (E-Locker/non E-Locker): WSS-M2C942-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300 With HD Tow Option) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-Q
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (U.S.):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Friction Modifier
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3

EST-M2C118-A

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.) :
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
CXT-10-LV12
Transfer case fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Transfer case fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

441

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Power steering fluid:
Motorcraft® MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Spindle bearing:
High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing
Grease
XG-11

WSS-M2C192-A

Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

-

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

-

Transmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake
pedal shift:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E

WSD-M1C227-A

442

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.

We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
E142732

Materials
Name

Specification

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP

443

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

WSS-M2C947-A

Capacities and Specifications

E240522

444

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
•
•

GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors

AM: 530-1710 kHz
FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz

Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.

AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
Radio Reception Factors

Distance and strength

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in
Ford CD players.

Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.

445

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.

Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.

In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

446

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System

E235504

A

SOURCE: Press to access
different audio modes, for
example AM, FM.

B

AUX: Press to access the AUX
and SYNC features, it also
cancels the menu or list
browsing.

C

CLOCK: Press to display the
clock.

D

TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.

E

select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the selected category. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.

Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you

447

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

F

MENU: Press to access different
audio system features.

G

Memory presets: Store your
favorite radio stations. To store
a radio station, tune to the
station, then press and hold a
preset button until sound
returns.

H

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

Audio System
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC

Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E217906

448

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
A
B

C

D

Display screen: Shows audio
and SYNC information.

G

Number block: In radio mode,
store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then
press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode,
select a track. In phone mode,
enter a phone number.
Function buttons: Select
different functions of the audio
system depending on which
mode you are in (such as Radio
mode or CD mode).
OK and cursor arrows: Press
the up and down arrow buttons
to select the various settings.
When you make your selection,
press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set, or press MENU
to exit.

E

TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.

F

Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.

449

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

CD slot: Insert a CD.

H

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

I

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

J

PHONE: Press to access the
phone features of the SYNC
system. See your SYNC
information.

K

MENU: Press to access different
audio system features. See
Menu Structure.

L

MEDIA: Press to open the media
source menu. You can press this
multiple times to change to CD
or to a SYNC-Media device or
scroll through the media sources
using the arrow buttons. Press
OK to select a source.

M

Clock: Press to access the clock
setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and
minutes. You can also set the
clock by pressing MENU and
scrolling to Clock Settings. If not
in phone mode, press to display
the clock.

N

RADIO: Press to listen to the
radio or change radio stations.
Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.

O

SIRIUS: Press to listen to
SIRIUS satellite radio.

Audio System
P

Q

Menu Structure

CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press
the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen
options of Repeat or Shuffle.

Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.

SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When
you make your selection, press
the left and right arrow buttons
to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source
independently.

Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.

Radio

Manual Tune

Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.

Scan

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

AST

Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands.

Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
RDS Text Display

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.

450

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System

SIRIUS

Scan

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)

Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS to activate, modify or track your account.

Check Channel Guide

Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel.
Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by
pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.

Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Alerts

Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.

Unlock All Stations

Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.

Skip No Stations

Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.

Parental Lockout

Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Speed Compensated
Volume

Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind
noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.

Sound

Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.

Occupancy Mode

Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.

DSP

Choose between the stereo modes.

Audio Settings

451

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System

CD Settings

Scan All

Select to scan all disc selections.

Scan Folder

Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.

CD Compression

Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.

Clock Settings

Set Date and Time

Select to set the time and calendar date.

24 Hour

Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.

Display Settings

Brightness

Select to change display brightness.

Language

Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.

Temp. Setting

Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.

452

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY

Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E217907

453

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
A

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

B

Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.

C

Memory presets: Store your
favorite radio stations. To store
a radio station, tune to the
station, then press and hold a
preset button until sound
returns.

D

TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.

E

MEDIA: Press to access
different audio modes, such as
AM, FM.

F

CD slot: Insert a CD.

G

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.

454

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.

•

Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access a station you save if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.

455

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System

Potential Station Issues
Issues

Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.

Cause

Action

This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
by the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.

Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out.
analog and digital audio.
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.

The previously stored
No action required. The
multicast preset or direct
station is not available in
tune is not available in your your current location.
current reception area.

Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.

*

There is no text information Data service issue by the
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster.
frequency.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed

HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables
when Scan is pressed.
HD2-HD7 channel search.

No action required. This is
normal behavior.

below.

*

*

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.

SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SiriusXM® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

456

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence
interference and the audio system may mute.
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.

E208625

457

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message

Condition

Action

Acquiring…

Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.

Satellite antenna fault

There is an internal module If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present.
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.

SIRIUS system failure

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.

Invalid Channel

The channel is no longer
available.

Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel

Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.

No Signal

The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.

The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel
programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.

Questions? Call

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.

1-888-539-7474
None found
Check Channel Guide
Subscription Updated

All the channels in the
Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked.
function on that station.
SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

458

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

No action required.

Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E205592

Note: The rear console USB ports are for
charging only. See Center Console (page
172).
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.

459

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION

E198355

•

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist and applications, such
as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC
*
AppLink.
•
•
•

•

Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).

*

These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.

Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
Stream music from your connected
phone.
Text message.

Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.

460

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.

When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.

In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.

Privacy Information

Driving Restrictions

When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.

For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.

461

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 476).

USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.

Initiating a Voice Session

E142599

Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.

Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.

Global voice commands

(cancel | exit)

This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.

help

This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.

(main menu | start again)

This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
•

Helpful Hints
•

•

Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.

•

462

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System Interaction and Feedback

The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.

The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.

Adjusting the Interaction Level
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
E142599

Voice Command

Action and Description

voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice

Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)

interaction mode advanced

Provides less audible interaction and guidance.

Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off

Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.

confirmation prompts on

Clarify your voice command with a short
question.

Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
463

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on

When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.

phone confirmation off

The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.

Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
To change the voice settings press the
Menu button then select:

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE

Menu Item

SYNC-Settings

Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.

Voice settings
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.

464

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing a Phone for the First Time

Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.

Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.

Using Voice Commands
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
E142599
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.

Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.

Press the voice and when prompted
say:

1.

Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.

Voice Command

Action and Description

(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) |
add phone)

Follow the instructions on the audio
display.

You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example,
where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.

465

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC may prompt you with more cell
phone options. Your cell phone may also
prompt you to give SYNC permission to
access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your
cell phone’s manual and visit the website.

Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.

Phone Voice Commands

Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.

E142599

Voice Command

Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:

(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Then say any of the following:

Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
Press the PHONE button.
Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
Press the OK button.
Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.

call (___)
call ___ at home
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
call ___ on other
dial [[a] number]
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone
| privacy on)

1

2

(hold call [on] | place call on hold)

2

join (calls | call)

2

mute call [on]

2

(mute call off | un-mute call)

2

(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])

466

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command

[text] (messages | message)

To access text messages say:
3

Voice Command

help

[text] (messages | message)

___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home".

Then say any of the following:

1

forward (text | [text] message)

(listen to | read) ([text] message)

See Dial table below.

2

These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3

reply to (text | [text] message)
call [sender]

See the text message table below.

Phonebook Hints

Dial Commands

To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:

Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Commands

Menu Item

411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)

Hear it

700 (seven hundred)
Changing Devices Using Voice
Commands

800 (eight hundred)
900 (nine hundred)

Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:

Clear (deletes all entered digits)
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.

467

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.

Voice Command

(connect |
device) ___

Receiving Calls

You can state the name of
the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”
or“My iPod”. SYNC may
ask you to confirm the type
of device (Phone, USB, or
Bluetooth Audio).

Accepting calls
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to accept a call
select:

Making Calls

Menu Item

Accept

E142599

Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:

Rejecting Calls
When receiving a call, you can reject the
call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.

Voice Command

call [[a] name]
dial [[a]
number]

To use the screen to reject a call select:

SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it. You can then
say:

Menu Item

Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Phone Options during an Active
Call

When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:

During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.

Voice Command

(dial | send) This initiates the call.
(delete |
correct)

To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:

This erases the spoken
digits.

To end the call, press the end call button

468

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Description and action

Mic. off

Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the
microphone on, select the option again.

Privacy

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.

Hold

Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.

Dial a number

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).

Join calls

Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.

Phonebook

Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Call History

Access your call history log.
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
1.

Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.

Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.

469

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Display

Description and action

Dial a number

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.

Phonebook

Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Call History

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Speed Dial

Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.

Text messaging

Send, download and delete text messages.

BT Devices

Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).

Phone settings

View various settings and features on your phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.

Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.

SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.

To hear the message you can say:
Voice command

Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.

(listen to | read)
([text] message)

470

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Description and
action

Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Using the screen you also have the following options:
Menu
Item

Description and action

Ignore

Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.

View

Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More...

If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
Reply to
sender

Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.

Call sender

Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.

Forward
msg.

Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.

Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1.

Press the PHONE button.

Choose from the following options:
Menu
Item

Description and action

New

Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.

View

Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.

Delete

Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.

More...

Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.

471

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sending a Text Message

Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.

Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1.

Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.

Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone and
text message notification, modify your
phonebook, and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.

Scroll to select from the following options:
Menu Item

Description and action

Set as master

If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.

Phone status

See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.

Set ringtone

Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.

Text msg notify

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.

Phonebook pref.

Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.

472

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Phonebook preferences

Add contacts

Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.

Delete

When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.

Download now

Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system.

Auto-download

When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent.

Sorting Pref.

Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
First/Last name

Last/First name
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.

Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
Select from the following options:
Menu Item

Add

Description and action

Pair additional phones to the system.
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.

473

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Description and action

2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Delete

Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.

Master

The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.

Conn.

Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.

Discon.

Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.

System Settings
1.

Press the MENU button.

474

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Scroll to select from the following options:
Display

Description and action

Bluetooth on

Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.

Set defaults

Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.

Master reset

Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.

Install on SYNC

Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.

System info

Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.

Voice settings

The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 462).

Browse USB

Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.

475

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.

SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.

In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is
compatible).

Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.

These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.

Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

911 Assist

If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 46). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 303).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.

Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.

476

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Setting 911 Assist On or Off

•

Press Menu then select
Menu
Item

•

Action and Description

SYNC-Applications
911 Assist Select the desired option, on
or off.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.

If you choose not to activate this
feature you will have the following
options:
Menu
Item

A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

Action and Description

Voice
Provides a display and voice
Reminder reminder at phone connection
ON
at vehicle start.

Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".

Voice
Provides a display reminder
Reminder only without a voice reminder
OFF
at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

477

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice

Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.

When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.

Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the
menu on-screen. Then select:

SYNC Mobile Apps

Menu
Item

The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.

Action and Description

SYNC-Apps
Mobile
Apps

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.

Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app or
select:
Find New Apps

Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.

Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.

Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.

Accessing an App's Menu
When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.

Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.

You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.

478

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".

mobile (apps |
applications)

help

Use this command to discover the available voice commands.

SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Menu Item

Action and Description

mobile (apps | applications)

SYNC prompts you to say the name of an
app to start it on SYNC.

list [mobile] (apps | applications)

SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.

find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)

Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.

help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.

App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.

479

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
•

•

To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or

location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.

Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
All Apps

You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.

App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.

480

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

There are three possible statuses:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Update Needed

The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.

Up-To-Date

No update is required.

Updating...

The system is trying to receive an update.

Update settings
Menu Item

Action and Description

Request Update

Select this option from the settings menu
to manually preform a needed update.

Disable Updates

Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
• USB 2.0.
• File format must be FAT16/32.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.

The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
• MP3.
• Non DRM protected WMA.
• WAV.
• AAC.

Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.

Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.

481

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Connect Using Voice Commands

To Connect Using the System Menu

Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.

1.

Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
source list in the audio display.

Press the voice button and when
prompted, say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

(USB [stick] | iPod
| MP3 [player])

You can now play
music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.

Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do
not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To view USB content select:
Message

Browse USB

Description and Action

Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Message

You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the
following:

Albums
Genres
Browse USB

Message

Reset USB

Play all

Media Voice Commands

Playlists

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

Songs
E142599

Artists

482

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Voice Command

Description and Action

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player])
voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".

Command

pause
play

Description and Action

Pauses device playback.
Resumes device playback.

play [album] ___
play all

Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.

play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]

Plays the next track on the current media.

previous [track | title | song | file |
podcast | chapter | episode]

Plays the previous track on current media.

[play] (similar music | more like this)

Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.

play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
repeat (one | track) [on]

Repeats the current track.

483

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Command

Description and Action

shuffle [all] [on]

Plays the current playlist in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)

shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)

At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.

•
•

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".

Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.

Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
•
•

Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
Play "Magical Mystery Tour".

To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press
the MEDIA button and select:
Menu Item

BT audio

Play song "Penny Lane".
Play "Penny Lane".

Then any of the following:

If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:

Voice Command

pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
Press the MEDIA button and select either
USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
in the audio display to start USB playback.

Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.

484

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Message

Options

Description and Action

This will enter the media menu.

Then any of the following:
Message

Description and Action

Shuffle

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Repeat track

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Similar music

You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.

Reset USB

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the
audio display) to select USB playback.

Accessing Your USB Song Library
1.

Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Message

Browse USB

Description and Action

This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.

If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media.

485

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

If there are media files, you have the following options:
Display

Play all

Description and Action

Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*

in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists

Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*

or MTP).
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs

Search for and play a specific indexed track.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.

Artists

Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists

*

*

and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums

Sort all indexed media files by album.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.

Genres

Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.

Browse USB

Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
1. Press the OK button to select.

*

*

486

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Display

Description and Action

2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Reset USB

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.

*

You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.

USB 2 (If Equipped)

Using Voice Commands

Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.

You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:

You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
You can access both USB devices by using
voice commands.

Accessing and Viewing USB Media

(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)

To access a USB device press the voice
button and when prompted say:

(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)

Voice command

USB 1

(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)

USB 2

(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)

Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.

(browse | search | show) all (song | songs
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___

Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings

(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___

You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 464).

(browse | search | show) playlist ___

487

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources

Voice Command

((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)

Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.

help

E142599
*

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

If equipped.

Radio Voice Commands

Voice Command

If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
E142599
say any of the commands in the
following table.

(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.

If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:

[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)

Voice Command

Radio

[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)

You can then say any of the following
commands.

(disc | CD [player]) play

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] FM1

[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)

[tune [to]] AM 2

[tune [to]] FM 2

[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])

Radio

[tune [to]] AM preset ___

tune [to] SAT

*

[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___

Sirius

*

[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___

488

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command

Voice Commands

[tune [to]] FM 2

[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])

[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___

[tune [to]] FM preset ___
FM ___ HD ___

tune [to] [Sirius]
Help

*

[tune [to]] Sirius
[channel] ___

[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
HD ___

*

You can say the
channel number (0233) to listen to that
Sirius station.

[tune [to]] preset ___
CD Voice Commands

Tune

If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.

help
*

E142599

If equipped.

Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped)

E142599

If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:

To listen to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after
the tone, say:

Voice Command

(disc | CD [player]) play
Voice Commands

You can then say any of the following
commands.

Sirius

pause

When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table.

play
[play] next track
[play] previous track

Voice Commands

tune [to] SAT

[play | change to] track [number] ___

[tune [to]] SAT 1

repeat (track | song) [on]

[tune [to]] SAT 2

repeat folder [on]

[tune [to]] SAT 3

repeat off

[tune [to]] preset ___

(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |
songs) [on]]

[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___

489

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.

Voice Command

(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
shuffle off

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

There is excessive background noise during a phone
call.

The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC performance.

Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.

During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.

The system says Phonebook
Try pushing your phonebook
Downloaded but the
This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using
phonebook in SYNC is
your phone's capability.
the Add Contacts feature.
empty or missing contacts.

490

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.

I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firmware.

491

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting.

Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

USB and media issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

I am having trouble
connecting my device.

This may be a possible
device malfunction.

Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an autoinstall program or active
security settings.

SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.

Bluetooth audio does not
stream.

This is a device limitation.

Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.

Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC
This is a phone-dependent
website to confirm your
feature.
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.

492

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The device is not connected.

Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.

Make sure that all song
details are populated.

The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection, which does
not allow it to play.

Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Review the phone voice
commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.

After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.

Review the media voice
SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
commands at the beginning
the name of a song or artist.
voice commands.
of the media section.

493

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.

Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".

If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
The system may not be
say "L-O-L-A".
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special characters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
voice commands.
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
SYNC does not understand
Wilson, say "Call Joe
or is calling the wrong
Wilson".
contact when I want to
Using
the
SYNC phone
make a call.
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the
SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the
understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it.
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.

494

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.

The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".

Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them.
special characters.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.

If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call JA-K-E".

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
paired and connected to
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
SYNC in order to find
find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have downloaded and installed the
AppLink-enabled apps are
latest version of the app
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on from your phone's app store.
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or

495

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
Sometime apps do not
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
finding the particular app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC,
and choosing 'Force stop.'
over ignition cycles, for
cannot find any apps.
Don't forget to restart the
example.
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.

There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.

496

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
My iPhone phone is
back in to the phone. After a
connected, my app is
The USB connection to
few seconds, the app should
running, I restarted the app
SYNC may need to be reset.
appear in SYNC's Mobile
but I still cannot find it on
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
SYNC.
Close" the application and
restart it.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.

The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.

Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
phone listed in SYNC's
available Bluetooth ports,
Mobile Apps Menu.
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.

Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.

SYNC System Reset

The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.

497

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Getting to Know Your System

GENERAL INFORMATION

The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.

E205444

498

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Item

Menu Item

Action and Description

A

Status Bar

This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.

B

Home

This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.

C

Clock

This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 546).

D

Outside
Temperature

This displays the current outside temperature.

E

Feature Bar

You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
The Status Bar

The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.

Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.

Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).

499

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

i

E249671

Callout

Item

Description

A

Driver Temperature

This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.

B

Heated steering
wheel

When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.

(If equipped)
C

Passenger
Temperature

When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.

D

Microphone Mute

This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.

E

Mute

This icon displays when the audio system is muted.

500

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Callout

Item

Description

F

Download

This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software
update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.

G

Wi-Fi

This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.

H

Wi-Fi in Range

An available Wi-Fi network is within range.

I

Signal Strength

This icon displays the phone and roaming signal
strength.

J

Text Message

This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.

K

911 Assist Off

This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.

L

In-Call

This icon displays when a phone call is active.

M

Bluetooth

This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.

Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item

Functions

Audio

Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.

Climate

Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.

Phone

Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.

501

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Feature Bar Item

Navigation
(If equipped)

Functions

Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.

Apps

Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).

Settings

You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 510).

Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.

Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.

Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.

VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.

Using Voice Recognition

Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.

Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).

SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.

The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.

502

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.

•

•

PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.

911 Assist

PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.

WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.
M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

See Steering Wheel (page 82).

Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
•
•
•
•
•

•

•

DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 146).

Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 445).

Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.

503

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
•

Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.

•

Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

•

If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, by visiting:

A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.

Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 46). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 303).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 546).

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.

To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.

504

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

•

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.

•

•

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.

•

Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.

Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.

Safety Information
WARNING

•

Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

•

•

Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).

See the following table for more specific
examples.

505

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Restricted features

Cellular Phone

Pairing a Bluetooth phone.
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.

System Functionality

Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.

Wi-Fi

Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.

Text Messages

Viewing received text messages.

Navigation

Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Website

Creating a SYNC Owner Account

www.syncmaroute.ca

Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•
•
•

Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Maintain account permissions.

SYNC Connect with Ford Pass (If
Equipped)

With a SYNC Connect-equipped vehicle,
you can use Ford Pass to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel
level and approximate mileage. You can
also schedule specific times to remotely
start your vehicle so it’s ready to hit the
road as soon as you are. Ford Pass is
available through a free download via the
Apple App Store® or Google Play™.
Message and data rates may apply.
Services may be limited by mobile phone
network coverage area.

Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca

506

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Updating Your System

Updating Over Wi-Fi

You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.

To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.

USB Updates

To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:

To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.

Menu Item

Settings

Website

Wi-Fi

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Available
Wi-Fi
Networks

The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.

You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.

You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 546). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 560).

The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.
Please refer to the website for any further
actions.

507

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Support

If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:

The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.

Menu Item

Settings

Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.

General

For Ford:

Automatic
System
Updates

United States: 1-800-392-3673.

From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you already are not
currently connected to WiFi access point, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.

Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.

When the system is connected via Wi-Fi
and automatic updates are enabled, your
system checks for software updates
periodically. If a new version is available, it
downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.

To switch this feature off:
Menu Item

Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates

If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 546). System

In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.

508

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access the system
data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order,

or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.

HOME SCREEN

E205446

Item

A

Tile

Audio

Home screen display

Shows the active media source.

509

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Item

Tile

Home screen display

If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the compass.
B

C

1

The name of the connected phone appears on the
screen. The status of the phone features also
appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge,
911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging
and roaming.

Phone

1

Navigation

This map displays your current location or current
route in real time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the
next turn and the length of time and distance to
your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the audio information.

If equipped.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.

You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.

To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
E142599
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.

Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.

The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.

Voice Command

There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and Description

Main Menu

Brings you to the main menu.

Go back

Returns you to the previous screen.

Cancel

Ends the voice session.

List of Commands

Gives you a list of possible voice commands.

___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:

510

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Voice Command

Action and Description

Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
Next Page

You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Previous Page

You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Help

Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.

Audio Voice Commands

Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.

To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Sirius Channel ___

Description
1

You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".

You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___

Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".

FM ___
FM ___ HD ___

1

Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.

Bluetooth Audio

Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetoothconnected device.

USB

Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.

Play Genre ___

For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".

Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___

511

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Voice command

Description

Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".

Browse ___

1 This

option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.

Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:
Voice command

Description

Set Temperature ___

Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).

Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Pair Phone

Description

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 546).

Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
512

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Voice command

Description

Call ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".

Call ___ at ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".

Dial ___

Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.

Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command

Description

<0-9>

If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.

Dial

Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.

Delete

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.

Clear

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.

Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Voice command

Description

Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___

You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.

Reply to Message

513

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Navigation Voice Commands (If

point of interest.

Equipped)

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations

Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a

You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Voice command

Description

Find an Address

Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.

Find a ___

State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".

Find a POI

Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.

Find an Intersection

Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.

Find the Nearest


State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.

Show Previous
Destinations

Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.

Show Favorites

Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.

Drive Home

Allows you to route to your home address.

Drive to Work

Allows you to route to your work address.

In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
Voice command

Description

Cancel Route

Cancels the current route.

Detour

Allows you to select an alternate route.

Repeat Instruction

Repeats the last guidance prompt.

Show Route

Displays the active route.

Route Summary

Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.

514

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Voice command

Description

Where Am I

Provides current location.

Zoom in

Allows you to zoom in on the map.

Zoom out

Allows you to zoom out from the map.

Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command

Description

Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.

List Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.

Find Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.

There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
Voice command

Description

Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app, followed by
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
help

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.

515

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Voice command

Show Traffic

Description

Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices

Displays a list of fuel prices.

Show 5 Day Forecast

Displays the 5 day weather forecast.

Help

Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice command

Description

Voice Settings

Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode
Standard

Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.

Interaction Mode
Advanced

Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.

Call Confirmation On

Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.

Call Confirmation Off

The system does not confirm before placing a call.

Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.

You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.

516

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.

ENTERTAINMENT

E205443

Message

Message and description

A

Sources

B

Direct Tune

C

Presets

517

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Sources

You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.

Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.

Menu item

AM
FM
SIRIUS

1

CD

1

USB

The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.

Bluetooth Stereo
Apps
1 This

If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.

feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:

AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station

Menu item

You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.

Action and description

Enter

Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.

Menu item

Cancel

Press to exit
without changing
the station.

A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.

Presets

To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:

Direct Tune

To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.

You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.

518

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.

SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

E234451

Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Menu item

Action and description

Browse

Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune

A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter

The system tunes to the station you select.

Cancel

You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.

You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.

519

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu item

Replay

Action and description

Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.

Live

ALERT

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 546).
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.

Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 546).

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.

Satellite radio signal
interference

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.

520

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Troubleshooting tips
Message

Acquiring Signal

Cause

Action

Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.

Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or
system failure present.
SIRIUS system failure

Invalid Channel

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.

The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able.
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.

Satellite acquiring
signal…

The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.

Questions? Call 1888-539-7474

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues.

None found. Check
channel guide.

All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked.
that station.

SIRIUS Subscription
updated

SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

No action required.

HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)

To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 546).

Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.

521

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:

The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

Website

www.hdradio.com

Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:

E142616

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message

Presets

Action and description

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.

Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.

522

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issues

Cause

Action

Echo, stutter, skip or
This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio.
the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.

The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.

There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not
No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio
normal behavior. Wait until the
broadcast is decoded. Once
audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

523

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Potential station issues
Issues

Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.

Cause

Action

The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
preset or direct tune is not
is not available in your current
available in your current recep- location.
tion area.

1
Text information does Data service issue by the radio
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently
broadcaster.
playing audio.

There is no text
Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
1
information shown for broadcaster.
currently selected
frequency.
1

You can find the form here:

Website

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

CD (If equipped)

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.

Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.

The following buttons are also available:
Button

Function

Browse

You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat

Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.

524

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Button

Function

For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle

Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.

Bluetooth Stereo or USB

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.

Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.

The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
Button

Function

Repeat

Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).

Shuffle

Play the tracks in random order.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.

While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:

Button

Function

Browse

If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.

New Search

This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All

525

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Button

Function

Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump

This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.

Explore Device

If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.

USB Ports

Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 543).

Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
E211463

The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.

The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.

Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.

This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.

Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.

526

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.

CLIMATE

SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.

Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.

If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.

Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 546).

SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.

E206820

527

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
A

Driver temperature: Touch up
or down to adjust the
temperature.

B

Heated steering wheel: Touch
this icon to switch the heated
steering wheel on and off. It
takes about 5 minutes to warm
the steering wheel to 74°F
(23°C) in temperatures as low
as -4°F (-22°C). The wheel
maintains an approximate
temperature of 90°F (32°C) and
operates independently from the
heated seats and other
climate-control functions. The
heating element is in between
the leather covering and foam
core to help provide maximum
heat without adversely affecting
the feel of the steering wheel.

set to HI. You can use this setting
to defog or clear a thin covering
of ice from the windshield. The
heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you
select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through
the windshield defroster vents
and demister vents.

Note: This feature only
functions when you switch the
engine on.
Note: The heated steering wheel
may remain on after remote
starting the vehicle, based on
your remote start settings. The
heated steering wheel may also
turn on when you start your
vehicle, if it was on when you
switched your vehicle off.

D

AUTO: Touch the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Select the desired temperature
using the temperature control.
The system adjusts fan speed,
air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside
air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to
maintain the desired
temperature.

E

Power: Touch the button to
switch the system on and off.
Switching off the climate control
system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.

F

DUAL: This button lights up
when the passenger controls are
active. To switch it off and link
the passenger temperature to
the driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button.

Note: For steering wheels with
wood trim, the heating feature
will not heat the wheel between
the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
C

Note: the passenger side
temperature and the DUAL
indication automatically turn on
when you or your passenger
adjust the passenger
temperature.

Defrost: A pop up appears on
the screen to display the defrost
options.
MAX Defrost: Touch the button
to maximize defrosting. Air flows
through the windshield vents,
the fan automatically adjusts to
the highest speed and the driver
and passenger temperatures are

528

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

G

Passenger temperature:
Touch up or down to adjust the
temperature.

H

Fan speed: Touch up or down
to increase or decrease the
volume of air that circulates in
your vehicle.

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
J

Note: You cannot adjust the fan
speed when the system is set to
AUTO or MAX A/C.
I

A/C: A pop-up appears on the
screen to display the air
conditioning options.

Manual airflow distribution
controls: Select these controls
individually, together, or with
Defrost to direct the air flow to
the area you desire.
Panel: Distributes air through
the instrument panel vents.

MAX A/C: Touch the button to
activate and maximize cooling.
The driver and passenger
temperatures are set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning automatically turns
on and the fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed.

Floor: Distributes air through the
demister vents, floor vents and
rear seat floor vents.

PHONE
WARNING

A/C: Touch to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Note: In certain conditions (for
example, Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even when
you switch the air conditioning
A/C button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to
switch the recirculated air on or
off. When recirculated air is on,
it may reduce the amount of
time needed to cool down the
interior (when used with A/C)
and help reduce odors from
reaching the interior.

Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.

Note: Recirculated air may turn
off automatically (or the system
may not allow Recirculated air
to turn on) in all airflow modes
except MAX A/C to reduce risk
of fogging. It may also turn on
and off automatically in Panel
or Panel/Floor airflow modes
during hot weather in order to
improve cooling efficiency.

Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.

529

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:

Websites

Menu Item

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices

Phone Menu

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.

This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.

530

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

G
E251249

Item

A

Menu Item

Recent
Call List

Action and Description

Displays your recent calls.
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down
menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
All

B

Contacts

Incoming

Phone
Settings

Missed

All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.
A-Z Jump

C

Outgoing

Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.

Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the
phone settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring
tones and alerts.

531

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Item

Menu Item

Action and Description

D

Change
Device

Gives you access to the list of paired or connected
Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a
device.

E

Text
Messages

Displays all recent text messages.

F

Phone
Keypad

Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call

G

Do Not
Disturb

Press this button to begin a
call.

Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do not display on the
screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.

Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.

Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 510). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.

532

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

To accept the call, select:

To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Menu Item

Contacts

Menu Item

Action and Description

Accept

You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.

Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item

Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.

To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Recent Call
List

You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.

During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.

To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Menu Item

The phone status items are also visible:
•
•
•

Action and Description

Phone
Keypad

Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.

Call

The system begins the call.

Signal Strength.
Battery.
911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 546).

You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:

Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.

Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.

533

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Item
Item

End Call

Privacy
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the
button on the
steering wheel.

Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.

Text Messaging

Keypad

Press this to access
the phone keypad.

Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.

Mute

You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.

Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).

Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Hear It

Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View

View the text on the touchscreen.

Call

To call the sender.

Reply

You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.

Close

To exit the screen.

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.

SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.

Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.

When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1.

534

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 459).

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
2. Follow the prompts on the
touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple
CarPlay.

Menu Item

Android Auto Preferences
Enable Android Auto

After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.

Note: Android Auto must be switched on
after plugging in your device.

To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:

To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:

Menu Item

Menu Item

Apple CarPlay Preferences

Android Auto Preferences

Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:

Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:

Disable

Disable

To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.

Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.

Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.

To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.

Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.

Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.

1.

Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.

NAVIGATION
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.

2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 459).
3. To switch this feature on from the
Settings screen, scroll left on the
screen and select:

535

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Map Mode

North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.

Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.

E207749

3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
E207748
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.

E207751

E251780

Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.

Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E251779

E207752

Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.

Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.
E207753

You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:

E207750

If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.

Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).

536

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.

You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
546).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:
Button

Start

Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item

Description

Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search

Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)

537

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Description

Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete
All
Home

Select this option to remove all previous destinations.

Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Work

Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Favorites

Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
Favorite bar.
Search

Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.

Save

Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.

538

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Description

The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
(POI) Categories configuration):
Food
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
See All

Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.

Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City

Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Save

This saves the destination to your favorites.

Start

This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Fastest

Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.

Shortest

Uses the shortest distance possible.

Economical Route

Uses the most fuel-efficient route.

The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel

On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.

539

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Menu Item

Start

Action and Description

The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.

Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button

Menu
You can then select:
Screen View

Full Map

A full screen map displays during navigation.

Highway
Exit Info

Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.

Turn List

Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.

540

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Button

Traffic List

You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.

Navigation
Settings

Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 546).

Where Am I?

Provides your current location city and the nearest road.

The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route

The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.

View Route

Press this to see a map of the full route.

Detour

An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.

Edit Waypoints

Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:

Optimize Order

To return to Go
your route
press:
1.

Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:

Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:

541

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Add Waypoint

The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.

You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order
for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press:

Go

SYNC AppLink

cityseeker (If Equipped)

The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.

Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).

First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation

E225487

When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search

cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.

Your paired phone can be used to access
additional points of interest (POI). These
points of interest can only be access when
your phone is paired.

When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.

Send To Car

Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.

You can send destinations to your
navigation system using a computer or
phone using AppLink.

542

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.

For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Navigation Map Updates

Restaurant
Business center
Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator
24 hour room service
Fitness center
Internet access
Pool
Wi-Fi

Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website

www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.

Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.

HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 543).

Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.

APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.

543

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.

Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.

Menu Item

Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.

Find Mobile Apps

Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites

Action and Description

SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.

Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.

The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.

Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.

Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.

544

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 546).

Equipped)

App Permissions

WARNING

The system organizes the app permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.

Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.

Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.

Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.

Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.

Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.

Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.

545

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby

Action and Description

Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.

Weather

Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map

Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.

Area

Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.

Ski Conditions

Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.

Sound

SETTINGS

Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:

Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.

Sound Settings

Reset All

Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.

Treble

Adjusts the high frequency level.

Midrange

Adjusts the middle frequency level.

Bass

Adjusts the low frequency level.

Balance / Fade

Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.

546

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Sound Settings

Speed
Compensated
Vol.

Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.

Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings

Stereo
Surround

Your vehicle might not have all of these features.

Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Menu Item

Podcast Speed

Action and Description

For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower

Normal

Faster

Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:

Cover Art Priority

Gracenote®
Management

Slower

Normal

Faster

Media Player

Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.

Gracenote®

The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.

Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
such as genre, artist, album.

547

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Action and Description

Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Information

This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.

Update Media
Index

Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.

You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Clock Format

Select how time displays.

Auto Time Zone
Update

When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.

Reset Clock to
GPS Time

When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.

Bluetooth

The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.

Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:

Menu Item

Bluetooth

Action

Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.

Phone

You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.

Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.

The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.

Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.

548

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Website

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone

Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.

Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
Menu Item

Action and Description

View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth
Device

You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.

You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect

Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.

549

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Action and Description

Disconnect
Make Primary

Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.

Delete

Removes the selected device from the system.

Pressing the info icon next to the device
name allows you to see phone and device
information
Menu Item

Action and Description

Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Auto-Download
Contacts

Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.

Sort By:

Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name

Last Name

Re-download
Contacts

Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.

Delete Contacts

Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.

Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No Ringtone

No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.

Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.

550

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Action and Description

Text Messaging
You can then select:
No Alert
(Silence)

No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.

You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout

When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.

You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Mute Audio in
Privacy

When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.

Roaming
Warning

When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.

Low Battery
Notification

When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off
setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
you can adjust the following option:

911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the
United States and Canada.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Emergency
Contacts

You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.

Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:

551

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Menu Item

FM HD Radio

Action and Description

Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.

AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Available)
Radio Text

This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.

Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.

Sirius XM (If equipped)
Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Category for After selecting a category, seek function only stops on channels which
Seek
are inside that selected category.
Parental
Lockout

Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allows
you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Edit Alerts

Select to switch on, off or delete alerts.

The Electronic Serial Number can also be found on this screen. This number is necessary
to activate, modify or track your account through Sirius XM.

Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.

552

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Map Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model

When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.

Breadcrumbs

When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.

POI Icons

Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:

Incident Map
Icons

Select POIs

This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.

Route Preferences
Menu Item

Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions

Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest
Always Use ___
Route

Fastest

Eco

Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.

Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Automatically
Find Parking

The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.

Eco Time
Penalty

Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.

553

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions

Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
Guidance
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Toll
Roads

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation
route.

Avoid
Ferries/Car
Trains

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing
a navigation route.

Navigation Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Navigation Preferences
Guidance
Prompts

You can adjust how the system provides prompts.

Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.
Voice Only

Only voice instructions are given.

Tones Only

Only a tone sounds to prompt you.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.

Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.

Note: All Mobile Apps may not be
compatible with the system.

554

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Menu Item

Mobile Apps

Action and Description

Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.

Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile
Apps

This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed

Up-To-Date

Updating Mobile Apps…

The system has
No update is
detected a new app
required.
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is
required.

The system is trying to receive
an update.

Request Update

Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:

555

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Action and Description

Request Update
All Apps

Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.

There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.

Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.

Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.

General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.

Menu Item

Language

Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.

Distance

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.

Temperature

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.

Touch Panel Beep

Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.

Automatic System Updates

When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.

About SYNC

Information pertaining to the system and its software.

Software Licenses

Documentation of the software license for the system.

Master Reset

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
System Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi & Hotspot

You can access the following:

Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.

556

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Action and Description

Wi-Fi

Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.

Available
Networks

This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.

Wi-Fi Available
Notifications

The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.

Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)
You can access the following:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Wi-Fi Hotspot
On/Off

Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.

Settings

Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.

Data Usage

Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.

Manage Devices

Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.

Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.

Note: It is the account owner’s
responsibility to remove the vehicle from
the vehicle network carrier account when
ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier for more
information.

Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.

557

Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Note: : Data, e.g. the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between Ford and the
vehicle network carrier to provide the
Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability, and may be used
to enable a seamless transition from an old
to new embedded modem and to confirm
any updates are successfully delivered.

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)

Note: : For your convenience